Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. you will use the default template. the parameter is one of association or connection. 12 Select DefaultMetric. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. In the Revit Architecture model. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. every drawing sheet. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. You learn the terminology. For most tutorial projects. the door retains this relationship to the partition. schedules. In this case. If the length of the elevation is changed. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. the floor or roof remains connected. 13 Click OK. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. drawings. the hierarchy of elements. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. how to navigate the user interface. As you work in drawing and schedule views.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click Open. hence. 2D and 3D view. scope. drawing sheets. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and phases when you need it. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. review the Revit Architecture templates. click Training Files. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. quantities.rte. and customize the project as necessary. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and schedules required for a building project. and residential. construction. In this case. the operation of the software is parametric. and open Metric\Templates. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. If you move the partition. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and plans. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. sections. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition.

View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. grids. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. programming is not required. and roofs are model elements. They display in relevant views of the model. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. dimensions. For example. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. filled regions. and keynotes are annotation elements. walls and roofs are hosts. levels. walls. Examples include detail lines. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects.When you change something. dimensions. tags. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. doors. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. They help to describe or document the model. doors. windows. Datum elements help to define project context. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. If you can draw. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. and 2D detail components. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. tags. For example. and cabinets are model components. windows.

floors. schedules. Most often. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. top of wall. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. elevation views. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. and so forth). The project file contains all information for the building design.In Revit Architecture. By using a single project file. In other cases. such as roofs. you do nothing to establish these relationships. for example. Often. for example. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. section views. views of the project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. first floor. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. To place levels. families. and drawings of the design. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . from geometry to construction data. you must be in a section or elevation view. or bottom of foundation. Project: In Revit Architecture. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. you can explicitly control them. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. and types. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. However. This information includes components used to design the model. and ceilings. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project.

the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. System families can be transferred between projects.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). System families include walls. For example. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. making it easy to understand what each button represents. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. For example. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. and similar graphical representation. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. floors. and levels. For example. the user interface is labeled. identical use. In the following illustration. categories of model elements include walls and beams. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. roofs. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can be a specific size of a family. In the steps that follow. However. A type can also be a style. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. specifically its clear user interface. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. ceilings. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. dimensions. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family.

The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. By default. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. click (New). The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. This creates a new project based on the default template.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. In addition. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

you type the required key combination to perform the command.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. and View. which are listed on the menu. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. While working in the drawing area. Edit. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. For example. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.

The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. 9 In the Type Selector. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. when you add a door. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. When you select the Door tool. For example. a door type is specified. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door.

■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. immediately below the Type Selector. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. In the drawing area. containing buttons grouped by function. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector.

In the Project Browser. click the tab in the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. select Views (all). 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .11 Click OK. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu.

delete. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . 3D). ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. The browser is dockable. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. reports. walls. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. families. sheets. families. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. schedules. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. windows). Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. To open a view. elevations. and rename views. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and groups. family category (doors. and group name. double-click its name.

the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. The cursor displays as a pencil. click Cancel. In the bottom left corner of the window. click Wall. In this case. After creating a browser organization scheme. Do not click.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). press F1 for context-sensitive help.18 On the Design Bar. Toolbar: From the toolbar. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. Click the Help button. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. You can use this tri-pane. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. If no Help button displays. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. click on the Standard toolbar. regarding selected elements in a view. in conjunction with tooltips. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. Windows: From any window. After you are familiar with these tasks. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. find a keyword on the Index tab. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. There are several tools that help you find information. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. In the status bar. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. press F1 for help. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. When you place the cursor over an element. Tooltips: To see tooltips. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. The status bar also provides information. 20 Press TAB. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. click Modify to end the Wall command. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. In addition.

Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the following steps. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. There are several ways to access zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. click Training Files. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. the view zooms out from the building model. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. For example. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 5 On the View toolbar. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the drawing area.

8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. To modify or add snap increments. on the View toolbar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 10 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 7 Click in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. As you move the mouse. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. this is referred to as a crossing selection. . and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. NOTE As you zoom in and out.

15 To exit the wheel. 17 Type ZR. expand Views (all). These are the drag controls. When drawing or modifying a building model. moving the wheel to the desired location. and click Help. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. as shown.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Similar controls. Small blue dots. and select the wall. To define settings for SteeringWheels. referred to as shape handles. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Cnst. press ESC. For more information about SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. display along the ends. and click the SteeringWheels tab. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. click Settings menu ➤ Options. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 2nd Flr. bottoms. called drag controls.

21 Select the Craftsman02 table. and click again to specify the ending position. In this case. The table moves down. such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . click (Move). to lengthen the wall. you want to move the table closer to the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.18 Click and drag the left control. Some commands. After selecting the element to move. and on the Tools toolbar. click to specify the starting position. 23 Click next to the lower wall. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. for example. as shown.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. select the second item in the list. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click Lines. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 24 Select the plant. Some commands. Move. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. and drag it on top of the table. such as the Lines command. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click again to end it. on the Standard toolbar. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 26 On the Undo menu. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z.

click Modify. On the Design Bar.29 To end the command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . 30 Close the file without saving your changes. Press ESC twice. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. Use detail components to define an assembly. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. and annotate building assemblies. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. 27 . details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. or referenced as a drafting view. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. In Revit Architecture. When you have finished these tutorials. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. illustrating how building components work together. detail. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. In this tutorial. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. but for training purposes. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow.

scroll until the folder is displayed. If necessary.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you will create a drafting view. enter Window Head Detail. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. import a DWG detail. 3 In the Scale list. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. click Training Files. and reference a drafting view. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. for Name.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. click Drafting View. create a reference callout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.

5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. The model zooms out. 9 Type ZR. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. displaying the extents of the detail.). The drawing area is still blank. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. 6 In the Colors field list. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. located directly to the left of the drawing area. 10 In the drawing area.In the Project Browser. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. as shown. select Black and White. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. and click Open.dwg. click Training Files.

13 Click Reference other view. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 14 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. click Callout.The view displays to the specified area. to activate the view selection list. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and in the Scale list. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Detail View: Detail. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 12 On the Options Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown.

rvt. adjust the detail view display settings. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 3 In the drawing area. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . select Callout. in the Type Selector. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area.The reference callout is created. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select Detail View: Detail. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. c_express_workshop_details_start. and in the Scale list. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. double-click the reference callout tag head. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise.

enter Wall Base 1. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. under Detail Views(Detail). for Name. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 8 On the Design Bar. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area. 5 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify to clear the selection. under Detail Views (Detail). and click Rename. double-click Wall Base 1. 4 Right-click Detail 0.

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.

16 Click OK. for Display Model. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. under Graphics. 13 On the View Control Bar.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. and click View Properties. click (Hide Crop Region). 14 In the drawing area. select As Underlay. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK.

click Detail Components. 19 In the Type Selector. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. typical details can easily be placed. and press ENTER. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. If the crop region is enlarged.Brick on Mtl. type 1' 6''. Directly above the drawing area. 20 In the drawing area. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. 17 On the View Control Bar. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. Stud. By grouping detail components. on the Options Bar. Model-Based Detailing | 35 .

25 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. as shown. expand Groups ➤ Detail.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. add the following detail components as shown. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 23 Using the same method. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance.

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .28 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail.

or instructions within a construction documentation package. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and under Keynote Table. map keynotes by material. c_express_workshop_details_start. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. and verify that Horizontal. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type.txt. for Full Path. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. For more information about customizing a keynote database. click Browse. click Training Files.rvt. in the type selector. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. In the next exercise. click Keynote ➤ Element.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. special notes. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. and format keynote styles. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. and Free End are selected. Leader. You can customize this list. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.

use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. If no value has been specified.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. Keynoting | 39 . 7 Click to place the leader arm.5 In the drawing area. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . or increase the size of the annotation crop region. a question mark displays. Either move the text inside. 8 Click to place the tag. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 9 Press ESC to end the command.

click Keynote ➤ Material. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. and click OK. 15 Select 07 21 00. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 16 In the drawing area.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 13 Click to place the tag. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.

Select Keynote Tags. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information.All items within the selection display in red. Click Check None. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Only the keynotes remain selected. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . 17 On the Options Bar.Boxed. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click OK. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 19 In the Type Selector. legends. Creating Details with Revit Architecture.

update the project information element properties. In this lesson. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Update drawing sheet and project information. Place views on drawing sheets. but for training purposes. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. and modify and update the project sheet title block.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. In this exercise. Add labels to a title block. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. you will create a sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. this tutorial uses imperial units only.

3 Click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. If necessary. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. In Revit Architecture. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). scroll until the folder is displayed.rvt. In the Project Browser. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. or in the element properties of the title block.

To pan. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. you can enter ZE to zoom out. Click OK. double-click Checker. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 In the Title Block. In this tutorial. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. hold down the wheel and drag. 7 Enter K. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. and click Rename. Smith and press ENTER. Then. enter A602. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet.4 Type ZR. For Name. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 In the drawing area. click Modify to clear the selection. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. enter Sections/Details. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click A602 . To zoom in and out. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. under Sheets(all). enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. roll the wheel.Unnamed. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on.

click Text. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. 17 On the Design Bar. enter Design Development. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . 15 In the Options Bar.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 20 Click and type Project Status. select the title block. 18 On the Options Bar. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. 13 Click OK. in the Type Selector. enter Freighthouse Flats. The Family Editor opens. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. select Text : 1/8''. (Left) is selected. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter 4/10/2008. enter J. Smith. For Project Name. For Project Status. For Client Name. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 16 Type ZR.

under Category Parameters. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. click (Load into Project). as shown. to add 28 Using the same method. in the Type Selector. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 29 On the Design Bar.21 On the Design Bar. click Modify to exit the command. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. select Label : 3/16''. and verify that (Top) are selected. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. and click OK. click Label. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. add Project Issue Date parameter. as shown. 22 Using the same method. and click. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

a viewport displays. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. select Override parameter values of existing types. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . and under Keynote Table.30 In the Reload Family dialog. place and modify a keynote legend. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. to a drawing sheet. you will create. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. click Browse. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. In this exercise. and click Yes. for Name. enter Keynote Legend . Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you will create. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog.Project. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. click Training Files. for Full Path. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet.txt. representing the view or schedule.

and drag Keynote Legend .5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.Sections/Details. on the Appearance tab. as shown.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. under Text. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. expand Legends. and click OK. double-click A601 . clear Show Headers. under Sheets (all). 8 In the Project Browser.

12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. The keynote legend is visible. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .Project as shown. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.

as shown. click Edit. expand Detail Views (Detail). and click Properties. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. The Keynote Legend is now blank. for View Name. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. select Filter by sheet. 19 Click OK twice.Project. not keynotes. and click OK. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. under Legends.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Keynote Legend . and click OK. for Filter. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.Sheet. enter Keynote Legend . at the bottom of the Filter tab. 15 In the Project Browser.

double-click A0 . The view remains selected. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing.The keynote legend is automatically updated. 2 In the Project Browser. and then add and update a Drawing list. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 .Title Sheet 1. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. The view title with line displays below the viewport. as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet.

5 In the Project Browser. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. expand Schedules/Quantities. Press ESC to clear the selection. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. by default. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. as shown. or omit view titles from sheets. define the information to include in a view title. and zoom in on the drawing list. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You can specify text attributes for view titles. 6 Type ZR.When you place a view on a sheet. Revit Architecture displays a view title. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. As part of a construction document set. 3 In the Type Selector. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. The drawing list remains selected.

8 In the Project Browser.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. select A602 .Sections/Details and select A801 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. and click Properties. under Identity Data. while pressing SHIFT. right-click the selected sheets. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . and click OK. including only sheets that contain views. under Sheets (all). The drawing list display is updated. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.Ceiling Plans. clear Appears In Drawing List.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

it is good practice to test the constraints. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. For example. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. As you develop the building design. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. After the beginning exercises. If the grid moves. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. the wall or column will move with it. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a curtain wall. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. a central service core. 57 . you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development.

Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. click Training Files. you load any required family type that is not in your project. The project is stored as a single file. 5 Click OK. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. views. The new project opens. you use a template that is provided with the software. with an RVT extension. from the product library. South. and customize the project as necessary. locate the Project Browser. construction. and residential. under Projects. West. 3 Under Template file. under Create new. click New. 2 In the New Project dialog. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. In views that display elevation markers. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. verify that the second option is selected. select Project. you design inside the elevation markers. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. For this project. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. In practice.rte.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. and settings. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. and click Browse. Creating the Project In this exercise. levels. notice four elevation markers. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. but contains no geometry. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. To create the project file. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. In the drawing area in the right pane. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. East. such as a door or window. you will use the default template.

Click Settings menu ➤ Options. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. as well as change their names. view the Save reminder interval. NOTE If you create a project without a template. 15 For Save as type.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. will be accessible from the Project Browser. and on the General tab. and elevation views created in the project by the template. delete. These views are customizable: you can rename them. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. then expand Floor Plans. 14 For File name.rvt) is selected. and duplicate levels. double-click South. Groups. Creating the Project | 59 . 8 Under Floor Plans. enter Revit Retail Building. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. and other properties. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Sheets (all). Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. and delete them. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Training Files. double-click Metric. and families in your project. change their properties. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. 16 Click Save. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. 13 In the file window. 7 If necessary. verify that Project Files (*. and Elevations (Building Elevation). such as schedules and legends. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. heights. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. content and building model reports. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. sheets.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. expand Views (all). Schedules/Quantities. the view you see in the drawing area. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). reflected ceiling plan views. Ceiling Plans. Families. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. display in the south elevation. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Two level lines. As you design and document your building model. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. you will want to save your work frequently. notice the Legends. You can add. created by the template. schedules. duplicate them.

you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. the other levels move and change with it. or constrained. to each other. You change the names of the 2 default levels. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and windows within the building model. and press ENTER. You learn how the levels are locked.17 Proceed to the next exercise. so that when one level moves. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. expand Views (all). 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click South. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. enter 00 Foundation. When you begin designing. Adding Project Levels on page 60. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. After you modify the two default levels. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. doors. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques.

The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. and press ENTER. enter -1800. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. enter 0. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. and then move it up. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. view the Design Bar. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. When you add the new level. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. and press ENTER. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. Next. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. By default.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. This is the Options Bar. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. and press ESC. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. and click Basics. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. If it does not. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. right-click. which should display by default. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. and click OK. 16 Enter 3750. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. enter 01 Entry Level. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. not all the tabs are visible. click Level. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 14 Click Plan View Types. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. As you move the cursor.

If you create a level by copying it. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. under Floor Plans. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. right-click Level 3. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. click Level. 25 Click to place the level line. click (Pick Lines). Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. enter 3750. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. click Rename. 26 Press ESC. using a different option. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and for Offset. and move it slightly upward. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. and rename the corresponding views. 19 Click OK. you add another level. Next. and enter 02 Level. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. or on the Design Bar.18 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference.

Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. as shown. and you can move them independently. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Notice that by moving the top level. the levels are no longer constrained. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. all the levels move. If you select a level and click its lock. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Adding Project Levels | 63 .Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line.

On the Design Bar. select (Draw). In a later exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. so that if the roof elevation changes. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. the column height changes as well. 3 On the Options Bar. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. In the following exercise.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. specify a start point for the grid line. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. When the grid is complete. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. Move the cursor up. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. under Floor Plans. and specify the grid line endpoint. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. double-click 00 Foundation. click Grid. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Modify. you constrain the column heights to the roof level.

enter 7500 mm. and for Offset. and click to place the line. for Offset. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. click Grid. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and click to place the line. and press ENTER. enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Enter A. click (Pick Lines). and click to place the line. Next. Click to place the grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. On the Options Bar. enter 4500 mm.

12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm.8 Press ESC. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. as shown. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. On the Options Bar. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. click Grid. click Grid. 11 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. click Dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL. select grid lines C and 3. click (Aligned). 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 21 Press ESC twice. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 18 On the Design Bar.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Starting with grid line A. 14 On the Options Bar.

You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click and drag the blue circular grip up. click Modify. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. until it is closer to grid line 5. 33 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. Two pins display on the grid lines. enter 50mm. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 32 Click OK twice.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. If necessary. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click . (Element Properties). The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. By pinning these central grid lines. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. click Modify. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. until it is closer to grid line A. and press ESC. and on the Options Bar. The pins are hidden. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. and select None. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. At the left endpoint of the grid line. click Duplicate. click the value for Center Segment. 26 In the drawing area. 29 In the Name dialog. 24 Press ESC. select grid line 5. enter 6. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and click OK. 31 For End Segments Length.5mm Bubble with Gap. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. and select grid line A. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. click Edit/New.

Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. and press ESC. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). select all of the grid lines. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. click Finish.5mm Bubble. click Structural Column. 36 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL.5mm Bubble with Gap. and on the Options Bar. click (Grid Intersection). Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 35 In the Type Selector. click Modify. For Place By. 37 Select the grid lines again. select Grid : 6. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. The original continuous grid lines are restored. select Grid : 6.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. and in the Type Selector.

47 Enter 9000. double-click 01 Entry Level. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. click Activate Dimensions. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. click Camera. select grid line A. lock it. 52 On the Options Bar. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Next. under Floor Plans. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. 45 While pressing CTRL. 43 Press ESC. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and press ENTER. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 46 On the Options Bar. If it is unlocked. select 01 Entry Level. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. for From. and unlock it.

54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. and click to place the target point of the camera.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.

expand 3D Views. The current view. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and click OK. Right-click 3D View 1. Adding Beams In this exercise. displays in bold under 3D Views.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. enter To Building. When you finish adding beams. under Views (all). and click Rename. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the Rename View dialog. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. and then copy them to subsequent levels. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. named 3D View 1 by default. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. Adding Beams on page 72. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing.

6 In the Type Selector. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Finish. 8 While pressing CTRL. 10 In the Project Browser. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. The view is currently set to Coarse. select each grid line. 9 On the Options Bar. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. click (Create Beam On Grid). under Floor Plans. The selected grid lines display as red. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. double-click 01 Entry Level. view the icons on the View Control Bar.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Beam. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click Medium. 7 On the Options Bar. the icon on the right side of the scale. Adding Beams | 73 .

click Modify. click (Default 3D View). select 06 Roof. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. press and hold SHIFT. double-click 01 Entry Level. right-click. and click OK. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. and click Select All Instances. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 14 Select one of the beams. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View toolbar. select 02 Level. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 On the Design Bar. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 17 In the Select Levels dialog.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. select 06 Roof. When you created the columns. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. All of the columns display as red. view the Top Level parameter. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. and if necessary. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. under Instance Parameters. resize the view to see the entire structure. 21 With the column selected. and click Element Properties. right-click. 06 Roof. 20 Click Cancel.to the 5th level. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. double-click To Building. 25 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties). Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. for Top Level. 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click 24 Press ESC. and click Select All Instances. Adding Beams | 75 . right-click. under 3D Views.

76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. under Elevations. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 28 Save the drawing. double-click South. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. as lines only. but you want to display them in less detail. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. press ESC to exit the command before continuing.

Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Braces | 77 . double-click 00 Foundation. Adding Braces on page 77. To better add the braces to the structure. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown.29 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces In this exercise. you create 8 framing elevation views. 3 On the Options Bar. click Framing Elevation. and press ESC to end the command. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure.

and when the endpoint snap displays. 11 Using the same technique. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. but when placed the braces are placed. After you add the final brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. click to specify the start point of the brace. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click the elevation marker arrow. click Brace. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 8 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 7 On the Design Bar. The associated framing elevation view displays. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). press ESC twice.

Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. Adding Braces | 79 .Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. enter 18000 mm. The height of the roof lowers. delete it and redraw it. and press ENTER.

16 On the bottom right side of the grid. under Floor Plans. but this time add them from right to left. 14 On the Standard toolbar. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. enter 10000 mm.

as shown in the 3D view below. 19 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). enter 12000 mm. and press ENTER. double-click 00 Foundation. 21 Select grid line A. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. NOTE As you add braces.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. Adding Braces | 81 . periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. under Floor Plans. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. click Activate Dimensions. 23 In the Project Browser.

beams. 29 In the Project Browser. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. double-click South. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. Test connectivity of the columns. and drag it away from the structure. Creating a Foundation on page 82. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. lock it. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. under Elevations. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and if necessary. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. under Floor Plans. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 26 In the Project Browser. click and roof height.24 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. 31 Save the drawing. grid size.

Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). under Extents. for Level. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. In the View Range dialog. Creating a Foundation | 83 . click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. click Edit. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project.Before you can add the pile caps. under View Depth. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. A warning displays. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and how to load specific families into a project. and click View Properties. Click OK twice. and press ESC twice. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.rfa. select Unlimited. double-click 00 Foundation. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. The pile cap has been added in the view. click Training Files. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. and drag it to the drawing area. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. and expand Structural Foundations. expand Families. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. After you load the pile cap family. The foundation pile cap now displays. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. under Floor Plans. for View Range. 9 Close the warning dialog. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree.

under 3D Views. and click Create Similar. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press ESC twice. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. When the final pile cap is placed.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap.

and click Select All Instances. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click. double-click {3D}. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. All columns in the building model display as red.rvt. under 3D Views. click Training Files. you change the types of the columns. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and brace families into the project. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. You load new column. 2 Select one of the columns. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. beam. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . beams. In the left pane of the Open dialog.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure.

Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type.2X101. click Duplicate. 10 On the Options Bar. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. you change the brace type. In the following steps. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 7 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Selector. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 4 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Name dialog. click Brace. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 While pressing CTRL. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). under Dimensions. and click Select All Instances. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12.9. and changing its size parameter. double-click Elevation 1-a. click Modify. enter 75mm. This not the size that you want to use.5CHS. click (Default 3D View). enter 75mm. The brace type changes. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. for d.6X15. The building model displays the round hollow columns. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams.3 In the Type Selector. 19 On the Design Bar. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. right-click. and click OK twice. click (Element Properties). for Type. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. but it is the only size of its type currently available. the braces as well as the beams change. 9 In the Type Selector. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. and click OK. click Modify. select M_Round Bar : 25mm.

3 Under Positioning. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.rvt. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog.Origin to Origin.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . select Auto . the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. After the files are linked. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. select m_RRB_structure_complete. and click Open.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. click Training Files.

and click Select Link. 9 In the drawing area. however. under Elevations. and walls could also be copy/monitored. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. select the linked Revit model. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar.4 In the Project Browser. select Multiple. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. double-click South. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. 5 On the Tools toolbar. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Grids. depending on the project. select Levels 00 through 06. while pressing CTRL. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 6 In the drawing area. structural members. In this case. click (Copy/Monitor). the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. 8 On the Options Bar. After the link is established. click Copy. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change.

18 Using the same method.10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. while pressing SHIFT. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). 15 In the New Plan dialog. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. for Floor Plan views. First. delete the Level 2 floor plan. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . right-click Level 1. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 16 Click OK. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Finish mode. click OK. under Floor Plans. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. click Finish. and click Delete.

20 In the drawing area. for Name. click OK. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .19 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Project Browser. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 25 In the View Templates dialog. right-click. and click OK. enter Floor Plans. right-click. double-click 01 Entry Level. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. select the Topography : Surface. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. under Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

33 Click at the upper left of the grid. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click Camera. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . select Floor Plans. under Names. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 34 In the 3D view that displays.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename.rvt. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. and railings are also created from sketches. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. such as roofs. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. stairs. Some other Revit Architecture elements. To create floors. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. enter To Building. 36 In the Rename View dialog. Adding Floors In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.35 In the Project Browser. and click OK. In this exercise. right-click 3D View 1. Adding Floors on page 92. expand 3D Views. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects.

past the first vertical grid line. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. click (Rectangle). You are now in the Sketch Editor. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. click Floor. Leave this dimension unlocked. On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. and elements in the current view display as gray. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. select the top floor line. and then the first horizontal grid line. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. Move the cursor to the left. click Dimension. At the top left corner of the grid. If the grid changes size. Do not lock the dimension. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. On the Sketch tab. under Floor Plans. Adding Floors | 93 .

5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. At the top left corner of the grid. and change their values to 300 mm. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Enter 300. press ENTER. Select and lock the dimensions. Do not lock the dimensions. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. select the top floor line. click Modify. and click the temporary dimension value. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ 7 On the Design Bar. They display on the floor sketch. and then press ESC. click Finish Sketch to create the floor.

Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors | 95 . ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. click Edit. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines.8 Select the floor. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. and press ESC. and lock the dimensions. using a different sketching technique. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. on the Design Bar. click Lines. double-click 02 Level. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. On the Sketch tab. enter 1500mm. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and for Offset. Select the three remaining floor lines. under Floor Plans. click (Pick Lines). Next. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. click Floor. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. and on the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. click Quit Sketch. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry.

20 On the Tools toolbar. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Lines. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. click (Rectangle). 18 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click (Align). Click the locks to constrain the floors. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click Floor. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor displays. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. and a lock icon displays. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 17 On the Sketch tab. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 03 Level.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid.

and lock the edges. select 05 Roof Garden. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. Alternatively. 31 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. and click OK. click Edit. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid.24 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. click Finish Sketch. 35 On the Sketch tab. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. under Views ➤ 3D Views. double-click 01 Entry Level. 32 Select the floor. under Floor Plans. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. Adding Floors | 97 .

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When a blue dashed line displays. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 1800 mm. Adding a Roof on page 98. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. click to place the roof line. Click (Pick Lines). click Training Files. click Lines.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Design Bar. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. double-click 06 Roof. To create the roof. ■ ■ For Offset. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. and press ENTER. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture.

Adding a Roof | 99 . enter 300 mm. for Offset. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. click to place the roof line. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left).6 Select grid line 5. and when the blue dashed line displays. 7 On the Options Bar.

10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Trim/Extend). Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. click Finish Roof. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). select the roof.

click Section. move the cursor down below the roof. and press ENTER. and click to specify the section.14 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. 15 On the Options Bar. on grid D. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. click Modify. for Elevation. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. Adding a Roof | 101 . 17 On the Design Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). enter -100 mm.

double-click 06 Roof. In section. click Edit/New. 24 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select the roof. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click Edit. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 30 Click OK 3 times. for Structure [1]. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. for Structure. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select Variable. under Construction. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. and on the Options Bar. (Element Properties).20 On the Design Bar. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view.

35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window.Roof Edge. Adding a Roof | 103 . moving counter-clockwise. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select Fascia : Fascia . Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. In this case. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan.31 On the Design Bar. on the View Control Bar. 41 Starting with the left front edge. click Modify. 33 In the warning dialog. click (Default 3D View). select each edge. 38 In the 3D view. 37 If necessary. click OK. select the section line. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. 40 In the Type Selector. and press DELETE. zoom in to the roof. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.

Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104.42 On the Design Bar. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. you add a curtain wall. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click To Building. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. so if you resize the grid. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. the curtain wall resizes with it. click Modify.

click Wall. under Floor Plans. enter 2100 mm. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). The type is saved in the project. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. enter Retail Storefront. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. enter 600 mm. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . For Height. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 1050 mm.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. for Join Condition.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. click to place the first curtain wall segment. For Level. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select 05 Roof Garden. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. For Offset. for Type. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. for Spacing. click Duplicate. When you duplicate a type. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. Under Construction. click Training Files. Click OK twice. select 01 Entry Level. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. click 01 Entry Level. for Spacing.

click (Trim/Extend). These dimensions are not in a sketch. click Dimension. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. double-click To Building. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so they remain in the view. and lock the dimensions. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. If the grid moves. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. If you want to hide them. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. you can delete the dimensions. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 15 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Design Bar.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. and trim each curtain wall segment.

and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Creating an Entrance | 107 . click Training Files. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance on page 107.

click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under Views (all). 7 Click OK. under the element list. and click None. All the elements in the list are selected. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. clear one element to clear all the elements. To better work with the curtain wall panels. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Do not select Columns. click All. 5 Under Visibility. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. and double-click South. 4 On the Model Categories tab. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 2 On the View Control Bar. 6 Under Visibility. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 17 In the Project Browser. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. in the Type Selector. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. in this case an architectural elevation. select Architectural Elevation. and click OK. 12 With the panels selected. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify. press and hold CTRL. select System Panel : Solid. 18 On the View Control Bar.9 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. under 3D Views. 10 Select 1 panel. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click {3D}.

21 Zoom to the front of the building. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South. 20 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.19 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building.

and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. and unpin it. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click Add or Remove Segments. click Modify. 27 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). and click to select it. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 24 On the Options Bar. select another mullion to the right. click Curtain Grid. select One Segment. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Type Selector.

112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. click (Default 3D View). 34 On the View toolbar. select it. and unpin it. press TAB until it is selected. and view the new entrance. 36 Zoom in to the first panel.

Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance.38 Press DELETE. and 4th panels. 39 Using the same process. open the North elevation. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. 3rd. 40 Optionally. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. remove the mullions from the 2nd. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 .

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Graphics. 5 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Underlay.rvt. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. select 02 Level. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and click View Properties. 3 Right-click in the view. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 4 In the Element Properties dialog.

select the grip closest to the callout head. 8 Select the callout. and click Rename.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. click Callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. which indicates you must draw the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. enter Display Area. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. and click to complete the callout.

15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 12 Draw a section line. as shown. right-click. and click Flip Section. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Section. 13 Select the section line. 16 Select the section box.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 Press ESC. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level.

For Loc Line. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. 25 Press ESC twice. click Dimension. right-click Section 1. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Finish Face: Exterior. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.135mm Partition (2-hr). select Wall faces. 26 On the Design Bar. Lock both alignments. click Wall. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. expand Sections (Building Section). double-click 01 Entry Level. and click Rename. 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Section Display Area. Click (Rectangle). for Prefer.17 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 27 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Interior . click (Align). 24 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 .

(Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. Notice that the walls extend to the floor.) 36 Press ESC twice. and lock the dimension. 37 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Ceiling. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 38 On the View Control Bar. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 32 In the Type Selector. double-click Section Display Area. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. under Sections (Building Section). 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. under Ceiling Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and lock the dimension. Next.

click (Element Properties). under Constraints. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 41 On the Options Bar. 43 On the Design Bar. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . double-click 01 Entry Level. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the walls. 46 Press ESC. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. for Height Offset From Level. for Top/Base. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. click to select it. click Modify. Select the 02 Level Floor.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. and click (Element Properties). and click to select the walls. On the Options Bar. 47 In the Project Browser. for Base Offset. click Attach. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. and press ESC. double-click Section Display Area. press TAB until you select the wall chain. under Sections. and click OK. under Ceiling Plans. under Constraints. enter 2700 mm. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling.

click Cancel. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. view the ceiling structure. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. for Structure. click (Rotate). under Construction. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click Cancel. double-click 01 Entry Level. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. under Ceiling Plans. 54 Click OK. click Edit. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.49 In the Project Browser. 58 On the Edit toolbar. for Type. click Edit/New. and click .

62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. enter 45. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .60 Click. and press ENTER. 61 Press ESC.

67 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click To Building. under 3D Views.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 66 Optionally. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 64 On the View Control Bar. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Shadows On. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 65 On the View Control Bar. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. click Shadows Off.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Offset. under Floor Plans. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and click to create a reference plane to the right. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. enter 1500 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. double-click 01 Entry Level. Move the cursor over grid line B. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 .rvt. and click to create a reference plane to the left. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and copy it to the 05 Level. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. 3 On the Options Bar. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level.

5 On the Design Bar. 2. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 7 Using the same method. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. click Stairs. C. click Modify. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. shorten the right reference plane. and 3. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 6 Select the left reference plane.

■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. Click (Rectangle). and specify a point. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . select Basic Wall : Generic . with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. The complete stair displays. Move the cursor down. click Wall.225mm Masonry. and select the 2nd reference plane. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. 10 On the Options Bar. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. including its handrails. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. beyond the end of the stair. select Finish Face: Interior.

select the dimension value.15 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. click Align. select Wall faces. and click to select it. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Prefer. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Modify. Lock the dimension. Select the interior face of the wall. Select the wall. and lock the alignment. 18 Using the same technique. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select the bottom of the stair. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. enter 1200 mm. and press ENTER. and specify a point away from the wall. click Dimension.

24 On the Standard toolbar. 28 On the Options Bar. Because the dimension is constrained. 23 Select the stair. clear Tag on Placement. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 25 While pressing CTRL. click Door.21 Select the dimension. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. and press DELETE. and press DELETE. 27 In the Type Selector. (Undo). select both reference planes. TIP To flip the door swing. The stair and walls move to the left. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. a warning displays. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door.

(Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. For Top Constraint. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 33 Select the stair.30 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. click Modify. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Align. (Element Properties). 40 Zoom in to the stairs. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click OK. but if you view the top level of the building. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. for Multistory Top Level. select all 4 walls. select 05 Roof Garden. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select 00 Foundation. for Base Constraint. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). click 36 On the View toolbar. 44 On the Tools toolbar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 35 On the View toolbar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). (Rectangle). click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. Click OK. (SteeringWheels). double-click 01 Entry Level. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels.

52 In the Select Levels dialog. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. click see the roof. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. click (Default 3D View).46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. on the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and lock the alignment. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. and lock the alignments. and click OK. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar.

click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. Under Constraints. For Top Constraint. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level.55 In the Project Browser. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. for Base Offset. By offsetting the base. (Default 3D View). ■ 58 On the View toolbar. click 59 On the View toolbar. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. 56 Select the shaft. double-click 01 Entry Level. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. (SteeringWheels). The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. enter 300 mm. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise.

and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Right-click in the view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. select 06 Roof. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click View Properties. click Training Files. for Underlay. under Graphics. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall.

15 In the error dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic .5 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. click . 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. and then select the right face of the wall. The exact placement is not important. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 7 On the Tools toolbar. select Elevation: South. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Align). 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. and click (Fillet arc). and press ENTER. and click Open View. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. click Edit Profile. enter 9750. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click Remove Constraints. and on the Options Bar. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. click Lines.225mm Masonry.

20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. under 3D Views. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click . double-click {3D}. 22 In the Project Browser.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . and click (Circle). and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar.

Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

click Component. 5 On the Basics tab.4.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as shown. under Floor Plans. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 6 In the Type Selector.5 Meters. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press ESC twice. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. select M_RPC Tree . between grid lines C and D. TIP After you place the 1st planter.

14 In the Name dialog. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Floor. under Dimensions. click Edit/New. as shown. under Floor Plans. click (Default 3D View). 21 On the Design Bar. For Offset. and in the Type Selector.5 Meters. under Floor Plans. 16 Click Apply. under 3D Views.5 Meters. (Element Properties). select M_RPC Tree . and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 10 In the Project Browser. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. 17 While pressing CTRL. click Lines. for Height. View the roof. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1.8 On the View toolbar. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 1500 mm. and click OK. click Duplicate. for Type. enter 2400 mm. and on the Options Bar. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and then click OK twice. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 18 In the Project Browser. 11 Select one of the trees. select the 2 remaining trees. double-click 01 Entry Level. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof.

for Offset. and click to sketch a line. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. enter 0 mm. and click to place the line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. 25 Using the same method. 26 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 29 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the right vertical floor line.

and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 34 On the Tools toolbar.30 On the Options Bar. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. click (Trim/Extend). and click to finish the line. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . move the cursor up 900 mm. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and click to finish the line. 32 Press ESC. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. clear Chain.

for Type. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 42 In the Name dialog. 49 On the Options Bar. enter Sidewalk. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. In plan view. click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. 45 Click OK. click Edit/New. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 48 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. select M_RPC Male : Alex.38 On the Design Bar. click Component. When you render an image. and click so he is facing the column. and on the Options Bar. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. a photorealistic image displays. for Height Offset from Level. The completed sidewalk displays. 39 Select the sidewalk. 43 Click OK twice. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. near Column E5. click Duplicate. as shown: (Element Properties). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter -250 mm. Next. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 .

57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 56 Press ESC twice. about 30 degrees.NOTE If necessary. 52 In the Type Selector. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. select M_RPC Beetle. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. click Camera. and click to place her on the sidewalk. and click (Element Properties). 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click the car. 54 In the Type Selector.

under Constraints. for Offset. Next. 63 Click the sidewalk. and on the Options Bar. under 3D Views. enter -300 mm. double-click West. click Pick Host. under Elevations. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. When you select a host for a component. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. 60 In the Project Browser. click Pick Host. 64 Select Alex. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. double-click To Building. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 66 Using the same method. If the sidewalk changes height. 65 Click the sidewalk.59 In the Element Properties dialog. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car.

the elements will be ungrouped in the project. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . After the service core is positioned. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. and replace them with a service core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

double-click 05 Roof Garden. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. click (Default 3D View). including the stairs. walls. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 6 On the View toolbar. and shaft opening. you delete the entire stairwell. 3 Select the entire stairwell. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 4 Press DELETE. 5 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . (SteeringWheels).

right-click m_RRB_core. expand Groups. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click Modify. and click Create Instance. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. expand Model. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. and on the Design Bar. click Training Files. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click (Align).rvt. and zoom in to the linked instance. and notice that the linked file is listed. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. double-click 01 Entry Level. 13 In the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. under Floor Plans. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. double-click 00 Foundation. 14 In the Project Browser. click OK.

19 On the Design Bar. or if the group layout is expected to change. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . (SteeringWheels). 18 Select the core. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. 17 On the Design Bar. and click to align the center. click Modify.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click (top down view). click Ungroup. (Default 3D View). and on the Options Bar. click 21 On the View toolbar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. ■ ■ Click grid line C. click Modify. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. 20 On the View toolbar.

you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.rvt. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. After you modify it. you add glass railings around the floor edges. where it is hosted within a railing family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. click Training Files.

9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. expand Renderings. The floor sketch displays. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. click (Split). 5 Expand Railing.rvt. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and on the Options Bar.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Conference. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . 13 On the Tools toolbar. 3 In the Conference project. Handrail only. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. 8 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. The rendering displays. and double-click Lounge Perspective. and click to split the floor. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. click Edit. double-click 02 Level. and select Glass. under Floor Plans. and expand Railings. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. in the Project Browser.rvt. and Parapet. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. click OK. expand Families.

23 Complete the sketch as shown. click Lines. and click to draw another line. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. verify that Chain is not selected. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and click to draw another line. 25 Select grid line B. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. click (Align). and click the lock to lock the alignment. and on the Options Bar. 24 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 18 On the Design Bar. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm.15 On the Design Bar. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and click to place it.

For Offset.rvt project. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click Finish Sketch. click Railing. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and lock the alignment. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 29 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 30 On the Design Bar. select Glass. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Dimension. click Railing Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Align). Lock the dimensions. for Type. and click OK. 33 On the Design Bar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 100 mm. and click the lock to lock the alignment.26 Select grid line D. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D.

150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Camera.37 On the Design Bar. 39 Click Finish Sketch. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. and a roof garden. balconies. NOTE For training purposes. exterior fire stairs. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. slight modifications to the building design have been made. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. 153 . BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. lofty ceilings.

154 .

Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. You learn how to create new views from existing views. section. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. how to create section and elevation views. including plan. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you learn how to create views from a building model. 155 . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.

expand Floor Plans.rvt. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. click Training Files.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 .

right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. and click OK. and click 1: 1000. Next. 14 On the View Control Bar.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Project Browser. click the current scale. under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan. double-click Vicinity Plan. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Under Floor Plans.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 Right-click.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.rvt.

NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Elevation: Building Elevation. double-click Level 1. click Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select 1:100. for Scale. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

8 On the Design Bar.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . click Modify.

and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 14 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). enter South East. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). expand Floor Plans. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. ■ Move the cursor down. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Elevations. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. select Section: Building Section. double-click South East. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and double-click Level 1. for Scale. select 1:100. click Section.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.

expand Sections (Building Section). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . 24 Select gridline F. click Modify. and double-click Section 1. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 23 On the View Control Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. using the blue circular drag grip. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.21 On the Design Bar.

Creating Callout Views In this exercise. click Modify. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. To create each view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.25 On the Design Bar.

and click to specify a point to complete the callout. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:50. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 167 . for Scale. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. double-click Level 1.rvt.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. select Floor Plan.Resulting callout view .

and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and select the callout boundary. ■ Select the middle grip. click Modify. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. under Sections (Building Sections). Creating Callout Views | 169 . enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 14 On the Options Bar. select 1:50. select Detail View: Detail. for Scale. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. click Modify. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.7 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. double-click Section 1.

■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Details).17 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Roof Overhang Detail. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. 18 In the Rename View dialog. under Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 171 . Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.

double-click Level 1. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. the elevation markers. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. open Metric\Families\Annotations. and click Open. click Training Files. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.rvt.rfa. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Custom-Section Head. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

enter 12.Filled. click the Annotation Objects tab. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. select the section line. and can be applied to the section line. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 .5mm Square. and click OK. Section Tail – Filled. . click Duplicate. clear any others. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. select Section Head . click Edit/New. Section Tail . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Section Head. 10 On the floor plan. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 8 In the Name dialog.Custom. 17 Under Category. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and click OK. and click OK. select the current project. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 For Section Tag. 19 Click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. scroll to Section Marks. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. and select 3. On the floor plan. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Under Category. scroll to Section Line.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. and select 2. click Load into Project.

Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK. 40 Press ESC. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. clear all others. and click OK. and click OK. For Corner Radius. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog.23 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. select Custom-Callout Head. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click Load into Project. On the floor plan. enter 6 mm. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 Click OK twice.rfa. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays.5 mm. For Line Weight. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 36 In the drawing. notice the square elevation markers that display. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select 12. and on the Options Bar. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 12. select Square. click Training Files. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK. 34 In the Name dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. select 3. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select the callout. and on the Options Bar. 39 Click OK twice. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. for Callout Tag. and click Open. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. for Elevation Tag. . . click Edit/New.5mm Square. click Duplicate.

47 Select Callout Leader Line. view regions. filters. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. click the Annotation Objects tab. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 43 Under Category. You learn to create view templates. masking regions. and select 7. expand Callout Boundary.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and select 4. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and visual overrides. select Dash. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 46 Under Category. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 45 For Line Pattern. 49 Click OK.

you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 5 On the View Control Bar. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. under Elevations. and double-click East.rvt. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 2 On the View Control Bar. The crop region displays as red. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom to Fit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating a View Template In this exercise. To accomplish this. click Training Files. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 6 On the View Toolbar. click (Hide Crop Region). click (Show Crop Region). 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

11 Under Visibility. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. grids. Creating a View Template | 177 . 13 On the View Control bar. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. levels. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. under Visibility.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. elevation markers. and section lines are now hidden in the view. clear Entourage. Callouts. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK.

178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click East. double-click North. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click Create View Template From View. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 18 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.14 In the Project Browser. 16 In the View Templates dialog. and click Apply View Template. under Elevations. click Apply. 15 In the New View Template dialog. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. and click OK. click OK. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. right-click North. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 20 Using the same method. edit the crop region as before.

for Bottom. Click OK twice. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. select Level Below (Level 4). for View Range. and click Properties. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. click Edit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 .View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. select Penthouse. double-click Penthouse. right-click. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Extents. for Level. select Level Below (Level 4). as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. Under View Depth. 2 In the Project Browser.

double-click Roof Plan. right-click.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Roof Plan. select Level 4. 6 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Bottom. for View Range. Click OK twice. click Edit. Under View Depth. select Level 4. for Level. and click Properties. under Extents. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

for View Range. 13 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. click Plan Region. 11 On the Options Bar. under Extents. click Edit. for Level. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . Click OK twice. for Bottom. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Unlimited. 10 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Finish Sketch.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 16 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click Lines. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. In the left corner of the building. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.

expand Floor Plans. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. under Views (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. in this case. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.rvt. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click the Filters tab. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. After you apply the filter. the fire rating of the walls.17 On the Design Bar.

for Color. 9 Click OK. and apply a color. click (New). click OK. click Override under Patterns. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. and click OK. Select contains. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. under Filters. 5 In the Filters dialog. click Remove. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click Add. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 12 On the Filter tab. and click OK. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. select the red color. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Enter Hr. 14 In the Color dialog. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. under Projection/Surface. and click OK. 17 Using the same method. under Basic colors. click <No Override>. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . select Walls. select Fire Rating. select Solid Fill. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Edit/New. for Pattern. enter Rated Walls. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 11 Select Rated Walls. under Categories. for Rated Walls. 16 Click OK. 7 In the Filters dialog.

To accomplish this. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Show Crop Region.rvt. 11 In the Type Selector. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. and click OK. select Invisible lines.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. as shown. 9 On the View Control Bar. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the View menu. 8 Select the crop region. right-click. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. click Masking Region. 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 On the View Control Bar. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 5 On the View menu. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.

15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Finish Sketch. click (Rectangle).12 On the Options Bar.

Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Color. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click black. right-click. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.Level 1. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click <No Override> to apply a color. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. click the current scale.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. select Solid fill. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click in the Patterns field. and click 1: 50. and click OK. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. right-click Unit 18 Plan . under Pattern Overrides. and click Override. 7 Under Cut. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 11 Click OK twice. under Visibility. right-click. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 4 On the View Control Bar. for Pattern. under Floor Plans. select Walls.

clear Grids. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Floors.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Visibility. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

and click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. right-click. for Pattern. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default.20 Right-click. 23 In the Color dialog. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Projection Lines. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . By using the previous method to make the selection. click a purple color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. under Lines. 25 Click OK twice. 21 Under Projection/Surface. select Dash. click <No Override> to apply a color. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. select the sofa. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. for Color.

click Modify. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . click By Category Override. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.28 For Color. select a bright green color. and click OK twice. 32 Select one of the lamps. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 29 In the Color dialog. click . 30 On the Design Bar.

how to add views to the sheets. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. click .33 On the View Control Bar.

select A0 metric. click Sheet. and click View.rvt. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and click OK. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. click Training Files. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Creating Sheets. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.

Click OK. For Sheet Number. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click Modify. and select the title block. expand Sheets (all). Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter A101. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 3 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 5 When the title block highlights. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. enter Site Plan. For Sheet Name.Unnamed.

enter 2009-1. enter 15 May. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter For Approval. For Client Name. for Project Address. For Project Status. 14 Click OK. For Project Name. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 2009. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. The new project information displays in the titleblock. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Number. enter J. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . under Other. click Edit. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Smith. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. enter Freighthouse Flats.

17 In the Project Browser.Layout Plan A104 .Elevations A107 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.rvt. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. for Name. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations A106 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click OK. and click Rename. and click OK. select the new sheet name. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Stairs In the following exercise.Sections A108 . select A0 metric. enter Floor Plan.Elevations A105 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Save. right-click. you add views to these sheets. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.

The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Elevations. 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view.rvt. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). select Level 1. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. double-click A104 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Floor Plans. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 .Floor Plan. The red border around the view no longer displays. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . and drag it to the sheet. click Modify. and click to place it. under Sheets (all).Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar.Sections. click Modify.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). double-click A107 .

and press TAB until it highlights. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. . move the cursor over it. select 1:5. and on the Options Bar. for View Scale. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 16 Select title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . zoom in to the grip. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

23 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click A108 . View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.Stairs. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. click Modify. and click to place it. 19 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 18 Under Floor Plans.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.

4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 2 Select the building section view. In order to do this. you must first activate the view on the sheet. enter 16700 mm. double-click A107 . and click Activate View. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. click Modify. and then make changes and deactivate the view. under Sheets (all). Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.Sections.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click.rvt. and press ENTER. 5 On the Design Bar.

7 In the Project Browser. After you create the sheet. and click Deactivate View. You modify the view to hide the view title. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.6 Right-click. double-click North. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.rvt. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise.

Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. enter Title Sheet. under Floor Plans. select the new sheet name. select A0 metric.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Camera. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click. The camera view displays. enter T. and click OK. and click Properties. 3 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the camera as shown. For Sheet Name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Click OK.

click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . and click to place it in the center of the sheet. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 13 In the Project Browser. enter 100000 mm.Title Sheet. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Under Extents. enter 18000 mm. 14 Under 3D Views. enter 1500 mm. double-click T . select Far Clip Active. 12 On the View Control Bar. Under Camera. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Target Elevation. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. For Far Clip Offset.8 On the Options Bar. Click OK. under Sheets (all). for Eye Elevation. 11 On the View Control Bar.

click Modify. for Show title. enter 635 mm. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. enter Viewport/no title mark. and click OK. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. select Scale (locked proportions). 25 On the Design Bar.15 With the view selected. and then click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Model Crop Size. Click Apply. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Name dialog. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. under Graphics. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. select No. 24 Click OK twice. click Size. click Modify. . for Height.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.

such as room and window schedules. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You also learn to create different types of schedules. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Tagging Objects In this lesson. Because of the open style floor plan. 207 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as doors and windows. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. expand Floor Plans. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.rvt. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.Level 1. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. click Training Files. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .

create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. as shown: 5 Using the same method. and click Room and Area. move the cursor to the right. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. right-click in the Design Bar. click Room Separation. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).

click Load. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Tags dialog.6 Using the same method. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . click Modify. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and press ENTER. and select the room tag. type U18-1. The room tag number displays in blue.rfa.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click to place the room and tag. click OK. indicating that it can be edited. click Room. click Training Files. 11 In the Tags dialog. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. click Modify. 14 For Offset. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click it. 13 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and the rectangle contains the room tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. verify that Tag on placement is selected. type 2400 mm. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 16 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. place rooms and tags. click Room. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER. 22 Click the room text label. 23 Using the same method. Dining. 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. type Entry. and press ENTER. Sequential letters are also supported. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet.18 Click the room text label. Click to place the new room and tag. type Kitchen.

click Modify. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Room Separation. 27 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag. and click OK. and moving clockwise. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. The rooms are already placed. on the Model Categories tab. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). 29 On the Design Bar. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . expand Lines. but they need to be tagged. under Floor Plans.Level 2.

click Tag ➤ By Category. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. clear Leader.rvt. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser.Level 1. 3 On the Options Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

101-106. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. type Corridor. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. For 104. click New. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. type Storage. select Storage. select Corridor. type Building Entry. 10 Edit the number to be 101.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. for room 101. and press ENTER. The room Number is U17-46. add 5 more rooms. for Name. For 102. For 105. next to Rows. For 103. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule.

click the Lines field. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and press ENTER. In the Lines field. you add room separation lines. click the Color field. For Room Separation. place rooms from a program list. type Stair. under Floor Plans. In the Line Graphics dialog. expand Lines. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 4 Click OK twice. 13 Save the file. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. For Weight. select 9. double-click Level 1. under Projection/Surface. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and modify room names.rvt. under Visibility. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Override.■ For 106. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Under Custom colors. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. click the bright green swatch.

First.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room Separation. click Room. click Modify. draw the horizontal line. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 .

for Room. select 101 Building Entry. type 2400 mm. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). for Room. select 102 Storage. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 14 For Offset. 11 On the Options Bar.

select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). under Floor Plans. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. double-click Level 1. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . 19 In the Project Browser. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 Using the same method. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. double-click Room Schedule. and zoom in to the Corridor. click Modify. 20 While pressing CTRL. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. place the following rooms. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). 17 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities.

31 For Key Name. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and click Add. for Rows. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.21 On the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. select Base Finish. under Available fields. type Units. click 23 On the Design Bar. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. Floor Finish. and click OK. under Constraints. and click OK. 27 Select Schedule keys. 30 On the Options Bar. 24 Open the Room Schedule. clear Room Bounding. under Category. type As Selected. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Rooms. and for all 3 finishes. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. (Element Properties). and Wall Finish. click New.

for Room Style.32 Using the same method. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. under Other. 38 Under U17-8. select Rooms. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. for Fields. double-click Level 1. select Room Style. 42 On the Options Bar. click Edit. 44 On the Options Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. right-click Room Schedule. select Units. click Check None. and click Properties. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. click (Filter Selection). 33 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. select Units. for Available fields. 36 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. 37 Open the Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. 43 In the Filter dialog. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click Add. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . All rooms are selected in the floor plan.

You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 48 Save the file. and double-click Level 1. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. at the warning prompt. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Public. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. select Room Style. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 4 In the New color scheme dialog. and apply it to the Level 1 view. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. and click OK. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 9 In the Project Browser. For rooms 102 and 105. (Duplicate). and 106. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram.46 Open the Room Schedule. type Room Type. right-click Level 1. under Views (all). Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. click OK. click 5 For Title. select Service. under Graphics. expand Floor Plans. click OK. under Floor Plans. 104. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Name. and click Properties. for Color. click the Color Scheme field. 103. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. type Room Type.

for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 14 Click OK twice. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). click Color Scheme Legend. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. expand Lines. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. clear Visible. select Room Type. click Edit. click Modify. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). under Visibility. and clear Room Separation. 19 On the Options Bar. click Edit Color Scheme. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click the value in the Color column. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select the color legend. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 17 On the Design Bar. under Schemes. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.

under Graphics. under Custom color. 29 Click OK twice. 23 Using the same method. click Modify. select blue. type 5 mm. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. on the Options Bar.22 In the Color dialog. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. type 25 mm. respectively. click Edit/New. 28 Under Title Text. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Swatch Width. (Element Properties). 30 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK. for Size. and click OK.

right-click Building Section. click Color Scheme Legend. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. under Graphics. for Color Scheme. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Visibility. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Edit. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. and click OK. and select Properties. double-click Building Section.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. 35 Click OK twice. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . under Sections. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. under Sections. select Room Type. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section.

(Filter Selection). 45 While pressing CTRL. 46 Click . select all the rooms in the stairwell. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room Style. and click OK. for Room Style.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. click . under Identity Data. and click OK. under Identity Data. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Check None. select Units. select Public. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 42 In the Filter dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms.

51 On the Options Bar. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. select Service. for Rows. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 54 While pressing CTRL. excluding the stairwell spaces. double-click Room Style Schedule. type Suites. and click . for Room Style. and click OK.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Schedules/Quantities. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . under Key Name for the new row. under Identity Data. click New.

A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. select Suites. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Areas and Volumes. but not beyond it. under Volume Computations. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identity Data. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. and click OK. select the room on the left side of the top floor. The color fill will extend to the roof.55 Click . verify that At wall finish is selected. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. for Room Style. The color fill extends to the roof. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 59 Under Room Area Computation.

select the stairwell room. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . 64 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. select Loft. 66 Click OK. 71 Click OK. select Level 2. 68 Click . and click 65 For Limit Offset.0. for Upper Limit. and the living room. 67 On the first level. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). type 0. . under Constraints. type -254 mm. the dining room.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. for Upper Limit. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 70 For Limit Offset. 72 On the Design Bar.

73 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.rvt. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}.

select Family and Type.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. under Available fields. and click Add. click Family and Type.Insulation on Plywood Deck . Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . under Category. 4 In the Type Selector. Clear Itemize every instance. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 3 While pressing CTRL. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . For Then by. select Roofs. and click OK. select Material: Description. 5 On the Design Bar.EPDM. click Modify. Select Grand totals. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 9 Using the same method.

type Estimated Cost. under Available fields. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. and under Fields. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. for Material: Cost.40 50. select Calculate totals. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. 21 Click OK. and click Add. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click Properties. click the Formatting tab. 20 For Formula. 23 For Field formatting. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. under Other.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Estimated Cost. click Edit. and click OK twice. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. for Fields. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Calculate totals. select Material: Cost. 12 Click OK. select Currency. Under Field formatting.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 19 For Type. for Name. select Material: Area. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff.

This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. 30 Click OK twice. either within family components or within the project template. and schedule the total distance of each path. 26 In the Project Units dialog. which inserts commas after every three digits. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. These shared parameters can be added to any family. The cost fields are formatted correctly. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and are defined and stored in an external file. you create a shared parameter file. can be used for any number-based parameter. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. select $. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. tag the line. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . Digit grouping.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. adding the shared parameters to a family. not just for currency.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. You draw a travel path line. regardless of category. click the Format value. 27 In the Format dialog. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. 28 For Unit symbol. creating a generic tag to tag the family. for Rounding. you create an exiting plan for the building. ensuring consistency across families and projects. 31 Save the file. for Currency. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and reporting the shared parameters. 29 Select Use digit grouping. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. In this lesson.

click New. select Length. click Training Files. type Exiting.rvt. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. and click OK. and click OK. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. for Name. click New. click Create. 11 Click OK twice. type OfficeStandardsParameters.txt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Type of Parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Under Parameters. for Name. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. for File name. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Training Files.rvt. type Travel Distance. 9 Under Parameters. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 1 In the Project Browser. type Path ID. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click Save. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project.rfa. under Parameters. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. 12 In the Family Types dialog. and select Instance. 13 Click Apply. under Parameters. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 14 On the Design Bar. otherwise the family loads into the current project. select Shared parameter. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. following the equals symbol (=). add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Load into Projects. click Add. If you have multiple projects open. 8 Select Instance. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click OK. and click Select. for Travel Distance Formula. click Add. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.rvt. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 10 Using the same method. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. group it under Dimensions. under Dimensions. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Click Training Files.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 15 If necessary. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. in the Load into Projects dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK. click Family Types. for Group parameter under. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. under Parameter Type. 9 In the Family Types dialog. select Constraints.rvt. type Length.

rft. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. select Travel Distance. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files. under Parameters. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click (Add Parameter). 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Label. select Travel Distance. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. click Label. under Category Parameters.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. click parameter(s) to label). 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Select. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 24 Click OK twice.

select Path ID. 29 In the drawing window. and move it down. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. click Modify. 32 In the Save As dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. for File Name.rfa. and click Save. 35 Save the file. type M_Travel Distance Tag. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.28 On the Design Bar. and click OK.rvt is selected. click Load into Projects. and press DELETE. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .

2 Zoom in to the corridor. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After the lines are tagged. under Floor Plans. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. select Chain. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 Move the cursor to the right. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. above the exterior door as shown. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.Placing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Component.Tagging. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.rvt. and click in the center of the corridor.Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. double-click Exiting Plan .

Tagging. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. through the door. type 1-1. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 8 On the Design Bar. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. clear Leader. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 .7 Move the cursor down. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. double click Exiting Plan . click Tag ➤ By Category. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). for Path ID. 17 On the Options Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. verify that Chain is selected. click Component.Level 2. click Modify. move the cursor near the right corner. under Constraints. click Modify. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. Placing. under Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. and click outside of the building. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 13 While pressing CTRL.

and click above the door to the stair. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. move the cursor to the left. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click in the stair. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. click Component. 23 Move the cursor down.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 21 On the Design Bar. and click.

Tagging. click Modify. 27 On the Design Bar. 33 For Name. and click OK. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Path ID. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. . type Level 1 Exit Distance. click Modify. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Category. type 2-1. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 30 Using the same method. under Constraints.24 On the Design Bar. 28 While pressing CTRL. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . click Tag ➤ By Category. Placing.

43 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 50 Save the file.rvt. and under Field formatting. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 46 In the Project Browser. in the third field.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select contains. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 41 Under Fields. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 40 Click the Formatting tab. in the first field. select Calculate totals. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. under Available fields. and click Properties. and click Rename. type 1-. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. in the second field. for Filter. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. type 2-. and click Add. select Path ID. 42 Click OK. 38 For Sort by. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and in the third field. for Filter by. select Path ID and Travel Distance. select Travel Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 49 Click OK twice. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. select Path ID. while pressing CTRL. 44 In the Project Browser. 35 Click the Filter tab. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Edit. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. under Other. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. under Schedules/Quantities. click Training Files. 36 For Filter by.

for Assembly Code. click the Value field.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Partitions . right-click Generic . click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 4 Under Available fields. select Walls. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and select C1010145 . under Categories.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select the following fields. 10 In the schedule. expand C . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK twice.Interiors ➤ C10 .Fixed Partitions. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .152 mm. right-click the Design Bar. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click OK. click the Fields tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . and click . expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. under Identity Data. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. and click Properties. and click View.

1 On the File menu. type Revit_Project. and click OK to create the database. and click Next. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. under Database. the database display may be different than that shown. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 9 Under Directories. select a location for the database file. click OK. click Training Files. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 3 Click New. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson.mdb).11 Close the exercise file. 11 Click OK 3 times.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .mdb. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. for Database Name. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click the File Data Source tab. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. and click Next. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click Create. 6 Click Finish. 8 In the New Database dialog.

which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. 13 Close the exercise file. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. For example. in addition to the Id column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Additionally. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project.

262 .

you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 263 . You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

Detailing 7 In this tutorial. like a standard door header condition. and metal studs. In the callout view. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. plywood. you trace over the building model geometry. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. In order to detail from the building model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. 297 . These components display at the required scale. add detail components.

The roof overhang detail displays. select As underlay. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Training Files. You load detail components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. click Training Files. Exact location is not important.rfa. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal.rvt. 7 In the drawing area. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and insulation objects. double-click the detail callout head. and click Open. After you add components. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. They are also view specific. 5 In the alert dialog. which means that all detail components. and click OK. as well as detail lines.Detailing the View In this exercise. you detail the view of the roof edge. region objects. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Repeating Detail.5mm. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar.8 Delete the component. click Modify. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 16 Click OK twice. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click Edit/New. select Corrugated Metal. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 17 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 406. click (Element Properties). 13 In the Name dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Detailing the View | 299 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 15 For Spacing. for Pattern ➤ Detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.

25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. and click Open. click (Move).20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ ■ Click Modify. 24 In the Type Selector. click Load. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 22 On the Options Bar.rfa. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. click Detail Component. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 31 To properly orient the component. Detailing the View | 301 . you load them as a group from a single file. 29 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. click OK. 30 In the Type Selector.rvt. press SPACEBAR 3 times. click Detail Component. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. and click Open. and place it in the detail view as shown. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 33 In the Type Selector.Because you still have several components to load.

35 On the Options Bar. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 38 Select the horizontal segment. click the Flip instance arrows. and click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select Chain. 37 Click Modify.

43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Detailing the View | 303 . select to near side. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. click Detail Component. For Offset. as shown. enter 140mm. 42 Click Modify. click Insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. ■ Click Modify. click (Move). Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar.

meaning they display only in this view. Like detail components. you add lines to your detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Lines. and lock the component. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise.45 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 51 Click Modify. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. they are view specific.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 47 In the Type Selector. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . as shown.

Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. select Thin Lines. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . click Detail Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. enter 10mm. 10 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. For Offset.4 Click Modify. For Offset. as shown. as shown. select Medium Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component.

as shown. and clear Chain. click (Draw). 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and draw the detail lines as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and press ENTER. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 26 In the Type Selector. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. When you turn the display model off. select Do not display. click Detail Lines. right-click. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. For Offset. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region.18 In the Type Selector. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. enter 10mm. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . select Vapor Barrier. and click Properties. 24 On the View Control Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select the Penthouse level line. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. draw the detail lines as shown. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. Click (Pick Lines). select Thin Lines. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. you add text notes to complete the detail.29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 32 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes on page 308. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Break Line. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. press SPACEBAR as necessary. Adding Text Notes In this exercise.

Adding Text Notes | 309 . click Dimension. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. click Text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. 6 Click Modify. Click again to specify the location of the text box. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Enter the text. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. and click to place the dimension. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader.

Keynotes. enter Typ. select a text note. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail.. and click the dimension text. for Suffix. on the Options Bar. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. Creating Detail Components In this exercise.7 Select the dimension line. Creating Detail Components on page 310. right-click. under Text Fields. right-click. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Roof Overhang Detail. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and press DELETE. (Filter Selection). Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. and save the exercise file. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click OK.rvt. click Select All Instances. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Roof Overhang Detail .

10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open. Creating Detail Components | 311 . select Medium Lines. 14 Click Modify. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. while pressing CTRL. select all the coping linework. in the Type Selector. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. and selecting the chain. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.rft. click Training Files. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 16 Click Modify. pressing TAB. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.7 Click Modify.

The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. navigate to your preferred location. 28 On the Options Bar. select the coping. for File name. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 24 On the Options Bar.18 In the Save As dialog. you place keynotes on objects. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click . click Detail Component. 31 Using the same method used previously. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 23 Using a window. double-click it in the Project Browser.rfa. 25 In the Filter dialog. and the component can be placed in the detail. click Load. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . enter Roof Edge. click Detail Component. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. The original linework remains selected. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. While pressing SHIFT. 30 In the drawing area. delete the underlying linework. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Load into Projects. click Training Files. Adding Keynotes on page 312. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Save. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 26 Press DELETE. clear Detail Items. 21 To place the component. 22 Click Modify. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail.Keynotes view is not the open view.

2 In the alert dialog. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click Open.rfa. In the Keynotes dialog. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19mm Plywood. use keynote 06160. Click to place the leader arm.C1. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. and click OK. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 63mm Rigid Insulation.D11. click Training Files. For the metal coping. click Keynote ➤ Element.rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.B5. click Edit/New. 6 Click Modify. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. (Element Properties). Roof Edge4. use keynote 07645. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Adding Keynotes | 313 . 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

use keynote 06160. use keynote 09250.20 Ga. For the 19mm Plywood Siding.9 In the Type Properties dialog. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. navigate to 07645. For the 50 x 150. using keynote 07460. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. You do this in order to keynote the component. click Detail Component. and click . 10 In the Keynotes dialog.A8. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.G1. click in the Value column.I1. FasciaProfile_1. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Selector. select Corrugated Metal. use keynote 06110. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.D1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.F1. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.D11. For the 50 x 300. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 17 Keynote the component. use keynote 06110. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 06110. 18 Save the file. 22mm Corrugated Steel . click Keynote ➤ Element. For the 50 x 200.F1.

12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rft. navigate to your preferred location. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Detail Component. select Medium Lines. and click Open. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. and select the right end point. and click Save. click Edit/New. 24 While pressing CTRL. 5 In the drawing area. 20 Click OK 3 times. 22 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select the left end point of the reference line. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 11 Press DELETE. 16 Select the component. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Save As dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. 15 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. and click Modify. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Load. 4 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties).Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 19 In the Name dialog. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 6 Lock the line. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Training Files. for File name. and click Open. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Medium Line Detail Component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 13 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Design Bar.rvt. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. click Lines. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects.

and click OK. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 30 Click Modify. 46 Click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. and click . 40 Click Modify. 47 Select the component. click (Move). 41 Select the component just added. and assign it keynote 06110. 37 Click OK 3 times. 38 On the Design Bar. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 29 In the drawing area. and click . 48 Using the same method used previously. 31 Select the component.25 Next. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail.G1. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Edit/New. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. and hidden) used in the view. 34 In the Name dialog. click Detail Component. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 49 With the component selected. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the same method used previously. and click .A1. click in the Value column. click Detail Component. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. select m_Light Line Detail Component. click Duplicate. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . against the 19mm plywood. invisible. name the component Air Barrier. 28 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Design Bar.A5. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and assign it keynote 07260. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Detail Component. and click the lower end at the break line. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. enter EPDM Membrane. and click .

leaving the detail component lines. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. click Detail Component. and click . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector. select Chain. 53 On the Options Bar. 55 Click Modify.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 .

66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa. select the component. Air Barrier. 50 x 200 Framing.A4. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 67 In the Type Selector. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 60 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. click Detail Component.rfa. name the component Vapor Barrier.58 Using the method used previously. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Invisible Lines. and Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260. 61 In the drawing area. 68 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element. 63 In the drawing area. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.

click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and press TAB. and click . 70 Using the method used previously. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. under Keynote Table. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 72 Save the file. Enter 07463.A9. The database file opens in a text editor. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and press TAB. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. add a keynote for the component. and assign it keynote 07210. name the component Batt Insul. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.A4.69 Select the component. Enter 07460.txt. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.rvt. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. click File menu ➤ Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 71 In the drawing area. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. 3 In the text editor. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and close the text editor. and press ENTER.A1.. click Browse.

Each keynote displays as a simple number. and click Open. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 13 Click Modify. navigate to 07463. In the Type Selector. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. click to place the leader. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Element. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.A1. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. 14 Save the file. select Absolute. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). 11 Click Modify. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.txt. and click to place the note. These details do not update with changes to the building model. After you create a drafting view. 9 In the drawing area.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. under Path Type. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. select all the keynotes. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type.

Creating a Reference Callout on page 321.rvt. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. right-click Drafting 1. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.Center to Center is selected. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Training Files. select 1 : 5. For Positioning. For Colors. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. and click OK. The detail that you import is in DWG format. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select Black and White. verify that Auto . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.dwg. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Click Open. and click Rename. for Scale. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).

9 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 Select the callout. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. delete the existing value. click Edit/New. click Rename. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 10 In the Rename dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. and click OK. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 12 Click OK twice. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Reference other view. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click EPDM Metal Coping.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. for New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Detail .No Reference. 3 On the Options Bar. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 5 Click Modify.

double-click A105 . click Modify. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays./Sect. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.Elev./Det. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. and double-click the callout. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . 18 Save the file. The callout is updated with the sheet information.No Reference). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. . 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter Gyp. enter Header @ Sliding Door. click Edit/New. 14 Click OK 3 times. Board. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. select Gypsum-Plaster. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. click Region Properties. for Name. for Name.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 In the Name dialog. click Filled Region. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 5 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.

17 Click Modify. select the width dimension. and enter 20. click . click (Draw).5mm. click 22 On the Options Bar.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. 19 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . 18 While pressing CTRL. 20 On the Design Bar. select the left and bottom edges of the region. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. 16 Select the left edge of the region. (Mirror). Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and on the Edit toolbar.

30 In the Name dialog. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit/New. Move the cursor up. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Finish. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.Finish. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. . click Filled Region. 33 Click OK 3 times. and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. for Name. 25 Click Modify. select Wood . 24 Select the mirrored region. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and click above the top of the region as the end point.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. enter Wood . click Region Properties. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

5mm. select Medium Lines. click Finish Sketch. sketch the new region as shown. 38 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). click . verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 37 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. select Medium Lines. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. verify that the thickness is 19mm.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click Filled Region. in the Type Selector. Draw a rectangle as shown. 39 In the Type Selector. and select the right edge of the wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 .

For Offset. click 48 Click Modify. (Align). Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.42 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 47 Click the reference plane. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. and press ENTER. 46 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. enter 6mm. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Finish Sketch. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Filled Region. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. enter 10mm.

Move the cursor down 305mm. Move the cursor left 25mm. 56 On the Design Bar. and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm. and click to select the point. and select the bottom horizontal line. For Offset. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and click to select the point. enter 0. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Select Chain. and press ENTER. click (Trim/Extend). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . click Finish Sketch.

click Training Files. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector. click Load. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 76. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. and right edges of the door panel region. 69 Select the bolt. For Offset. 62 Select the left detail line. click Detail Component.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 61 Click Modify. and press ENTER. top. and click Open. select the height dimension. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 65 On the Options Bar. enter 3mm.rfa. select Medium Lines. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 68 Click Modify. and press ENTER.2mm. 60 Select the left. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

use the images as a guide. 71 On the Options Bar. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Wide Lines. 74 Select the expansion bolt.70 On the Design Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. click Detail Component. and click Open. click Training Files. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . 76 In the Type Selector.

87 Click Modify. click . and on the Edit toolbar. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 85 On the Options Bar. (Mirror). 82 Select the rectangle. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. click .78 On the Design Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. select Thin Lines. 79 In the Type Selector. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar. 80 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines.

click (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. as shown. select Medium Lines. 90 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 92 Select the line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 89 On the Design Bar.

draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. click Detail Component. 99 Click Modify. and press ENTER. 101 On the Design Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 102 In the Type Selector. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click . select the length dimension. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. enter 3mm. 97 On the Options Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 95 On the Design Bar. select M_Break Line.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 103 Add two break lines as shown. click Detail Lines. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 105 In the drawing area. click Dimension. click Dimension. and click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 108 In the Type Selector. 107 On the Design Bar. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . and click Modify.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 110 Select the dimension line. using the Drag Text grip.

114 Click OK. and then click the dimension text. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. under Dimension Value. 118 Select Modify to end the command. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. under Dimension Value.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. click Dimension. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. 113 Under Text Fields. enter See Schedule.2. for Below. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. select Replace With Text. and click the dimension text. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar.5mmArial. and enter Varies. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Replace With Text.

select the gypsum board region on the left. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click to create an arced leader. 126 In the drawing area. click Text. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and on the Options Bar. and click Modify. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. and click to place the text. Board.121 Click OK. 128 Select the note. 123 Click OK. 127 Enter Gyp. 125 In the Options Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 .

338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 132 Save the file.131 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 339 . you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. and double-click East. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.

Hexagon. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. click Modify. for Number of Leaders. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Symbol. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 7 On the Design Bar. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 8 Select the keynote. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar.rfa. type 1.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

on the Options Bar. click (Copy). for Text. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click (Element Properties). 12 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Note Block | 341 . 13 Select the tag. type Seal existing doors and insulate. and click OK. and click above the tag to place the copy.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected.

type B. and on the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . on the Options Bar.14 With the copy selected. and click. 15 For Text. 17 Click OK. 18 Using the same method. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. on the Edit toolbar. click (Element Properties). make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. (Mirror). Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 19 With the tag selected. 16 For Tag. click Copy. type Repair existing door surround.

Remove all existing windows. and moving counter-clockwise. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . using the table as a reference. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Tuckpoint as required. click Modify. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean exterior brick wall. Repair existing door surround. 22 Optionally. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.21 On the Design Bar. Repair as required.

Clean cut and repair wall as required. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. for Heading. On the Formatting tab. Select Text. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Tag. select Tag. 29 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. format. under Available fields.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. for Note block name. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. On the Appearance tab. and for Alignment. and click Add. and click OK. select Center. select Exterior Construction Notes. 27 In the column header (text). expand Schedules/Quantities. 28 In the Project Browser. and double-click A103 . 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Elevations. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. 26 Click OK. and click Add. type 6 mm. for the value. type Exterior Construction Notes. for Header text. for Sort by. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Create. type Description. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. expand Sheets (all). and select Bold. type Mark. verify that Arial is selected.

you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.31 On the Design Bar. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.rvt. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. click Modify. double-click T .rvt.

type T. and drag it to the sheet. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. for Filter by. Select Sheet Name. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. select Sheet Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Add. On the Filter tab. select does not equal. in the first field. for Sort by. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and expand the right column to accommodate the text. select Sheet Number. under Sheets (all). double-click T . and in the third field. ■ 4 Click OK. under Available fields.Title Sheet. select Sheet Index. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. in the second field. select Sheet Number. The drawing list displays. 5 In the list title field.

doors. For the text. 11 Save the file. Finally. Training File Using Legends | 347 . 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. door frame schedule. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. On construction documents. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference.9 On the Design Bar. windows. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. On construction documents. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. and door frames. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. and so on). you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. click Modify.

Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click OK. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Duplicate. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. type Typical Symbol Legend. and click OK twice. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. select Arial. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . for Name. click Symbol. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Name. you create a text type with the necessary size. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 For Text Font. type 3mm.rvt. click .Open Level Head . 6 On the Options Bar. type Legend Text. click Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 For Text Size.

expand Legends. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and double-click A101 . verify that is selected. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. expand Sheets (all). 16 In the Project Browser. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.Site Plan/Floor Plan. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . and for Leader. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. and click to place it. 14 Working from the top down. click Typical Symbol Legend.

18 On the Design Bar. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Sheets. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 Save the file. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. select Viewport : No Titlemark.17 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. click Modify. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. click Modify. select Viewport : No Titlemark. and click to place it. double-click A102 . 21 In the Type Selector.

For View. and press ENTER. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.rvt. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 3 For Scale. type 900 mm. and click OK. select Section.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. select 1 : 50. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. for Name. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . For Host length. select Medium for Detail Level. click Legend Component. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View Control Bar.

for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 10 Select the second wall. click to add text without a leader. for Leader. 12 In the Type Selector. for Family. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. click Modify. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. and on the Options Bar. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 13 On the Options Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. click Text. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.9 On the Design Bar.

20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 19 Type the following text. right-click Sheets (all). The text note with leader is added to the legend. click to add text with a single-segment leader. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. and click New Sheet. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . select Level 4. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 23 In the Project Browser.

double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. under Legends. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. double-click Level 4. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 26 On the Design Bar.25 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. The open drawings are both visible. select 4th Floor Wall Types. click Modify to end the command. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Project Browser. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . drag it onto the sheet.

click (Match Type). Creating a Component Legend | 355 .Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 34 Select the patio divider wall. select the Wall Type 2 component. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 35 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Medium. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 33 In the floor plan view. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend.

rvt. click 37 Save the file. In this exercise. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.36 Optionally. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. or changes in building material availability. under Floor Plans. Using the table. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You can create a sequence of revisions. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. double-click Level 4. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. These changes can be due to owner requests. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. contractor inquiries. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.

yet as concise as possible. If Visible is not selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. If you select Per Sheet. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. the revision is locked and issued to the field. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. 7 Under Show. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. For example. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. if the active revision is number 1. verify that Per Project is selected. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 5 For Description. type a date. When you use this option. When Issued is selected. for Numbering. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. In general. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. In most instances. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.

You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. including revision number and revision date. 9 Save the file. click Modify. 5 Select the divider. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Revision clouds have read-only properties.8 Click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you make changes to the project floor plan.rvt. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 3 Select the divider. double-click Level 4. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. move the cursor up. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. click (Move). and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar.

and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click near the partition you moved. and click OK. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 11 On the Design Bar.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. select Snaps Off. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Finish Sketch. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Revision Cloud. In the Snaps dialog.

for Line Weight. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 16 Click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. select 6. click the Annotation Objects tab. 17 Save the file. you load a revision tag into the project. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. you need to add one. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click Tags. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because you chose to number by project. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. click Training Files. the cloud is tagged as number 1. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 10 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. Working with Revisions In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and because the revision is the first in the project. 8 In the Tags dialog. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 12 Save the file. You then issue a revision. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click to place the tag. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed.rfa. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. 5 In the Tags dialog. click OK. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 6 Click Load. scroll down to Revision Clouds. select Leader. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar.

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 Add another revision row. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. under Sheets.Unnamed. You can continue to add revisions. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 7 For Description. click Add. with the description Relocate Door. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.rvt. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. type Modify Paving Area. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. NOTE After you issue a revision. you prevent further changes to the revision. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. and enter a date. double-click A107 . Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. you can no longer modify it. and enter a date for the revision. You do this by issuing the revision. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Issued. and click OK. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock.

17 Using the same method learned previously. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. click to add a revision clouds. 2 . double-click A107 . 16 Add another revision cloud as shown.Modify Paving Area. select Tag ➤ By Category. Working with Revisions | 363 . double-click Level 4. select Seq. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. under Sheets (all). 10 In the Project Browser.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. in the drawing area.Unnamed. 11 On the Drafting tab. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. select Revision Cloud. apply Seq. 19 To add tags. 3 . for Revision. select the revision cloud. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 12 In the drawing area. 15 On the Options Bar.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 20 On the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

for Sequence. 25 Click OK twice. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. delete the first 3 characters. and rotation) to the revision schedule. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . In order to make formatting changes (appearance. You do this so that the revision can be changed. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 26 In the drawing area. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. Click Options. clear Issued. for Numbering. For each revision. select Alphabetic. beginning with "D". select the titleblock. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. you edit the titleblock family. height.

37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Edit Family. click Yes. select Bottom-up. click Load into Projects. 28 In the alert dialog. Working with Revisions | 365 . Select Outline. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. for Appearance. Select Grid lines. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. and click Properties. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. click Modify. 34 On the Design Bar. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. Clear Blank row before data. 33 Select the schedule header. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. under Other. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. click Edit. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. and press DELETE. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics.27 On the Options Bar. and drag it above the schedule area. click Yes. for Build Schedule. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. right-click Revision Schedule. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog.

Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. and click Properties. right-click Revision Schedule. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . With a user-defined height. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. for Rotation on Sheet. under Other. select the revision schedule. for Heading. 46 Click OK twice. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. open the titleblock family for editing. 45 On the Appearance tab.. 40 Select the revision schedule header. select 90° Counterclockwise. select User defined. for Height. When the height property is variable. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. click Edit. enter Rev. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. for Formatting.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format.

Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Load into Projects. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . 51 Save the file. you learn to import information (such as images. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. text.

JPG.Title Sheet. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Title Sheet. 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. double-click T . double-click T . 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 On the Design Bar. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. under Sheets. click to add text without a leader. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Leader. and place it on a sheet. click Text. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets.Importing Image Files In this exercise.

The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 .doc text file in another window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. with the new text box still selected. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 11 Save the file. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. 9 On the Design Bar. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 6 Select the text. click Modify.

9 Click to place the image on the sheet.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This step has been completed for you. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. click Training Files. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. This process may vary from system to system.JPG.xls. click Desktop. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. for File name. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. double-click A102 .rvt. click File menu ➤ Print. type Fixture Schedule. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.Unit 18. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. for Name. 4 Under Printer. 10 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. and click Save. select the document writer.mdi. This exercise demonstrates a common method. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. under Sheets. click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser.JPG. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 12 Save the file.

The large floor plan. called dependent views. 371 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. or footprint. To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. you break up the plan into sections. as well as a large lab building.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.

enter Level 2 . and the model crop is the interior crop region. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 5 Click in the drawing area. double-click Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. right-click Level 2. and click OK.Aviary. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 4 In the Rename View dialog.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. under Level 2. and click Rename. click Zoom To Fit. The dependent view opens. 6 In the drawing area. 3 In the Project Browser. select the crop region. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . for Name. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. click (Hide Crop Region). 9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.Labs. 14 Click in the drawing area. right-click Level 2. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and on the Zoom flyout. 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 12 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout. enter Level 2 .10 Click in the drawing area. 15 Select the crop region. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Zoom To Fit.

23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. click Matchline. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. double-click Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . under Floor Plans. click (Hide Crop Region).

click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 24 On the Design Bar.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. and click. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

Unnamed. click Level 2 . and click Rename. enter Level 2 Aviary. right-click A101 . Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. for Line Weight. select Double Dash. select 9. 33 In the Project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock. for Name. and click OK. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.Aviary. and click OK. 31 In the Project Browser. 27 Under Matchline. click the Annotation Objects tab. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 28 For Line Pattern. and drag it onto the sheet. under Floor Plans. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. expand Sheets.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . 26 In the Object Styles dialog.

under Floor Plans. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. double-click Level 2. 39 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and place the Level 2 . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.Labs dependent view on the sheet.Aviary is selected. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.35 On the Design Bar. click View Reference. for Target view.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 41 On the Options Bar. for Target view. 45 On the Zoom flyout. click Modify. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit.Labs. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 .

Aviary. click (Show Crop Region). click the far right control. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. double-click Level 2 . after modifying the annotation crop region. 49 If. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 48 Select the crop region.46 In the Project Browser. 47 On the View Control Bar. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. under Floor Plans. right-click. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. click Zoom To Fit. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). under Floor Plans. select all views in the list. 53 In the Select Views dialog. 51 On the View Control Bar. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 54 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Dependent Views. 52 In the Project Browser. 55 On the Zoom flyout. but are not placed on sheets. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . expand Level 1.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and click OK. right-click Level 2.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. click Zoom To Fit.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click South Elevation. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.57 On the Zoom flyout. The matchline is already placed in the view.

Right. 5 In the drawing area. enter South Elevation . expand South Elevation. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and drag it toward the center of the view. cropping the view to the lab building. and click OK. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . 7 On the View Control Bar. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. cropping the view to the aviary. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.The dependent view opens. and click Rename. enter South Elevation . select the Crop Region.Left. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the crop region. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. for Name. right-click South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region). 9 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. for Name.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View on page 403.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The perspective view displays. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. click Camera. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.

and adjust the field of vision. right-click 3D View 1.3 Zoom out. as shown. With the camera shown. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. and click Show Camera. If the camera is not shown in the view. Depending on camera placement. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . as necessary. and select the crop boundary.

under 3D Views. and click Rename. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.Day to open the view.Day. 10 Save the file. enter Exterior . right-click 3D View 1. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. double-click Exterior . 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 8 In the Project Browser.6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. and click OK.

c_Pool_House_in_progress.Day. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. modify render settings.rvt. under 3D Views. and render a daytime view of the exterior. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior . You then duplicate the view. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.

408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Click OK twice. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. You adjust cloud settings as required. 3pm. 3 In the Rendering dialog. 7 In the Rendering dialog. for Sun. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 8 Under Quality. under Background. and click Rename. NOTE If a background image is required. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. select Sky: Cloudy. for Setting. enter Spring Equinox . select Edit/New.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. for New. 5 In the Rename dialog. under Lighting. and click Render. select Spring Equinox. select Medium. In this case. You create a location and time for the rendering.Santa Monica. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day.

13 Close the Rendering dialog. 10 In the Rendering dialog.png). click Export. select Portable Network Graphics (*. click Desktop. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.9 In the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. For Files of type. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Show the model. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . Click Save.

for Name. and click Artificial Lights. under Lighting. and click OK. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . right-click Exterior . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Name. enter Pool Lights. highlight 9 :Sconce Light .Night. select the first light. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Day view to Exterior .Night view open. click Dialog).Exterior . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only. under Group Options. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.Day. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. enter Pool House Lights. on the View Control Bar. under Group Options. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . click OK. under Ungrouped Lights. and click OK.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Flat Round : 60W . under 3D Views.120V to the Pool Lights group. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . press and hold SHIFT. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. you duplicate the view and change the settings. 22 Using the same method. verify that Pool Lights is selected. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Flat Round : 60W . add 30 :Sconce Light . 25 Using the same method. click New.120V. and click OK. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. click New. and click Move to Group. 16 With the Exterior . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. To select a sequential list. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. and select the last light. for Scheme. dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . click Render.Flat Round : 60W .Flat Round : 60W .Night. under Ungrouped Lights.

32 Save the file.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. and click OK. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . click Adjust Exposure. After the image is rendered. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 30 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. In this example. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. enter 4. click Show the model. you change the brightness of the exposure. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and finally. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. define the perspective view and rendering settings. Adding RPC People In this exercise. render the views. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.

but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. ■ (Rotate). 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. select RPC Female : YinYin. 4 In the Type Selector. Adding RPC People | 413 . Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. the person’s line of sight.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. Exact placement is not important. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. and on the Edit toolbar. click Modify. and place the component inside the pool house. click Component. 6 Select the figure. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans.

12 Click OK 3 times. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. you can enable this option. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . By default. for Render Appearance Properties. click Edit/New. click Edit. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Save the file. select Cast Reflections. under Identity Data. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click (Element Properties). under Parameters. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. on the Options Bar.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. In order to see the figure’s reflection.

Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. click Camera.

4 In the Project Browser.The perspective view displays. under Extents. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. and click Properties. select Section Box. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. under 3D Views. and click OK. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1.

10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select the section box. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . under Floor Plans.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Elevations (Building Elevations). double-click Level 1. 11 In the 3D view. in addition to the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. In order to accurately adjust the section box. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South.

size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 13 In the South Elevation view. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown.12 In the floor plan view. select the section box. right-click. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

and render the interior view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows.15 Maximize the 3D view. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. To create a daytime view. and curtain walls. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 17 Save the file. doors that contain windows or glass.

and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. under Lighting. After these settings are established. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight.Night. select Draft. 5 Click Artificial Lights.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 Under Quality. under 3D Views. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. for Scheme. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. you turn them off for this scene. and click OK. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. right-click 3D View 1. 2 In the Rename View dialog. click Render. select Interior: Artificial only. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 8 In the Rendering dialog. enter Interior . You can specify a lower quality. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. clear Pool Lights. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. for Setting.rvt. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. 4 In the Rendering dialog.

16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. select Curtain Walls. 13 In the Rendering dialog. for Daylight Portal Options. The preset schemes are read-only. click 14 For Setting. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. the daylight portals can be turned on. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior .9 Close the Rendering dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. select Region. for Scheme. 17 In the Rendering dialog. and click Render. right-click Interior . click Copy To Custom. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . and click OK.Santa Monica. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times.Night. select Interior: Sun only. in order to turn on daylight portals. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. For sunlit interiors. but the space will receive standard daylighting. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. for Sun. select Edit. you must create a custom setting. For more information on daylight portals. In this case. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog.Day. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You create a view for the interior during the day. (Show Rendering Dialog). This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. By default they are turned off. 3pm. select Spring Equinox .

Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. Click OK. and on the Options Bar. under Image.18 In the Rendering dialog. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Show the model. click Properties). In the next steps. For Saturation. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. enter 10. select the column on the right. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. click Adjust Exposure. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. and close the Rendering dialog. 20 In the Rendering dialog. enter 1.

click OK.22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Resolution. For Bump. enter 5''. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. add a bump map to create texture. 26 Click Update Preview. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 23 With the column still selected. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. and click OK. the render time increases significantly.6. select Wood. select the crop boundary. 30 In the drawing area. select Printer. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 24 In the Materials dialog. click the dimensions for Size. under Output Settings. click (Show Rendering Dialog). clear Region. and on the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). 29 In the Rendering dialog. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . enter 90. For Amount. and click Render. select High. 32 In the Rendering dialog. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. For Rotate. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. for Setting. You change the varnish setting. As size and DPI are increased. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. select Unfinished. select Based on wood grain. Click OK. For Width.

When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. or section view. but you can also define it in a 3D. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. In a plan view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Usually. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. The walkthrough path is a spline. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. independent of the Revit Architecture software. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project.The rendered image displays. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. elevation. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving.

Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. click Training Files. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and open Common\c_Townhouse. on the Options Bar.rvt. verify that Perspective is selected. click Settings ➤ Project Units. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and change unit formats as desired.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. click Walkthrough. If you prefer to use metric values. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 1st Floor. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. proceeds through the dining room. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu.

and double-click Walkthrough 1. on the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. click Finish. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.

and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . 13 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. verify that Field of view is selected. 11 Under Change. and click OK. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. If it is not. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 16 On the Options Bar. for Width. 12 On the View menu. enter 16''. select the crop boundary. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). enter 9''. click the dimensions for Size. 14 Click . for Frame. and select the crop boundary. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. on the Options Bar. and for Height. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 17 Click . 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. enter 1. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60.

Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. c_Townhouse. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Extents. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. clear Far Clip Active. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. proceed to the next exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. click (Element Properties).The walkthrough plays. press ESC. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Floor Plans. 2 On the Options Bar.

You can move any camera target or key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 6 On the Options Bar. for Controls. select Path. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 7 Click the third key frame position.

select <Shading>. shading. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. and click OK. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. The walkthrough is recorded. click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. under Walkthroughs. If you are unsure of what option to use. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. enter 15. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. hidden line. 3 Under Format.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. for Compressor. for Frames/sec. for Model Graphics Style. reducing the size of the image. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. under Output Length. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. When you export the walkthrough. double-click Walkthrough 1. shading with edges.rvt. on the Options Bar. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Save. . specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. or rendering. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 9 To play the walkthrough. click Edit Walkthrough. specifying the number of frames. and save the exercise file with a unique name. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. c_Townhouse. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs.

Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. In this tutorial. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. More specifically. 431 . Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.

and open Common\c_Solar_Study.Creating a Solar Study . 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click shown.Courtyard View In this exercise. and double-click 01 Entry. as shown. A 3D view is created. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.rvt. 4 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). (SteeringWheels). you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Camera. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 On the File menu. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. right-click 3D View 1. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. if necessary. 7 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . 6 Click the view boundary to select it. click Section. you create a section cutaway view. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views.5 On the Design Bar. and click Rename.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.Courtyard View. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. as shown. and click OK. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. enter Solar Study . click Save As.

as shown. expand Sections. click Modify. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click . double-click the section head. click 10 On the View toolbar. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 11 On the SteeringWheel. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Rename. click Modify. 6 To view the section. right-click Section 1.5 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 13 On the Design Bar. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway.

right-click Callout of 01 Entry. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. you create a plan cutaway view.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 16 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 17 To hide the section box. right-click {3D}. as shown. 5 In the Project Browser. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.14 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. In some cases. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. under 3D Views. double-click 01 Entry. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 18 On the File menu. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. Typical plan views. clear Section Boxes. click Save. including the house. click Callout. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. do not display many elements in 3D. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. then select Medium. click . changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 4 In the Project Browser. then Fine. and click OK. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. and click OK. and click Rename. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Floor Plans. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse.

click Modify. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. as shown. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 16 On the View Control Bar. so you can see into the building from the top.8 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click (SteeringWheels). 11 On the Design Bar. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 15 Select the Roof. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model.

Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 21 On the File menu.17 On the View Control Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . under 3D Views. and click OK. right-click {3D}. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. 19 In the Rename View dialog.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Save. under 3D Views. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 18 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. and click Rename. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .

3 Select Cast Shadows. you specify the location. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and click Duplicate.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. date range. 2 On the View Control Bar. For the Single-Day solar study. you specify the location. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. Click the Single-Day tab. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Los Angeles. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 10 Under Place. single-day. For the Multi-Day solar study.Creating Solar Studies . You can create a still. expand Views (all). 9 In the Name dialog. and click OK. enter Summer Solstice. expand 3D Views. . You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. click click OK. date. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. select Los Angeles. for City. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. For this study. MA. or multi-day solar study. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. leave the slider at 50. USA is selected. click . 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study .Boston. click . and time range. and time. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 4 For Sun Position. CA. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. USA.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise.

4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select June 22. Los Angeles is selected. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439.Courtyard View is currently displayed. enter Winter Solstice. 14 In this case. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 2008. for Sun Position. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter 10 and press ENTER. select Winter Solstice. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. and click Duplicate. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . on the Single-Day tab. 7 On the Options Bar. 2008. and click OK. for Date. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Los Angeles. confirm that Summer Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . ■ For Time Interval. For Time Range. click Save. and click OK. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. click OK. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 19 On the File menu. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 6 On the View Control Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. click OK. enter 20 and press ENTER. under Frame. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Under Frame. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click . click . and click OK. select December 22. 2 On the View Control Bar.

440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click To play the animation from start to finish. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 14 On the Options Bar. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. double-click 01 Entry. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. on the Single-Day tab. . you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. The solar study animation plays. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. 13 On the View Control Bar. select Summer Solstice. click OK. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. approximately as shown. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise.■ To display the next key frame. . under Floor Plans. Los Angeles. click . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. for Sun Position. click Text. click To display the next sequential frame. and click OK. . click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click . 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. click .

■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. 6 On the View Control Bar. click . 8 For Sun Position. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . 5 In the Project Browser. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. as shown. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. approximately as shown. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. as shown. Click and enter Dining. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. click Lines. expand 3D Views. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click . On the Options Bar.

select Summer Solstice. select the section box. select Section Boxes. if necessary. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. and enter 5 to 50.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. on the Single-Day tab. 15 To hide the section box. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. clear Section Boxes. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. as shown. and click OK. select Frame Range. under Output Length. click OK. and click OK. 14 Click outside of the section box. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 11 To display the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. ■ For Frames per second. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. verify that the value is set to 15. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Los Angeles. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. Under Format.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . for Model Graphics Style. Click OK. Los Angeles. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. click . The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. or frame. For Frames per second. To maintain the proportions of the frame. select Frame Range. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. verify that Hidden Line is selected. select Winter Solstice. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. verify that Hidden Line is selected. on the Single-Day tab. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.■ ■ Under Format. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. and click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog.Los Angeles. enter 450 in the first field (width). verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click OK. under Output Length. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . verify that the value is set to 15. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 3 For Sun Position. and enter 5 to 10. For Files of Type. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. To view the animation. click OK. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. for Compressor. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. for Model Graphics Style. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. select AVI Files. For Dimensions. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. you open each image. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. of the animation separately. For File Name.

Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.Los Angeles. enter 450 in the first field (width). 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. For File name.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Click OK. 8 Click Save. For Files of Type. or any single-frame format. under 3D Views. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. BMP. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway .■ For Dimensions. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. click the Desktop icon. depending on the Frame Range. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. In this example. such as JPEG. or GIF. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click Save. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. TIFF. select PNG. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. as shown: 9 On the File menu.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.

Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. USA. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 5 Select the roof. For Time Interval. for Sun Position. and click OK. select One week.Los Angeles . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click OK. 8 On the View Control Bar. For Time. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. MA. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. clear Section Boxes.Week Interval. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. click the Multi-Day tab.Boston. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. specify 2:00 pm. for File name enter 2pm . and click Duplicate. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. 12 In the Name dialog. and on the View Control Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK.

In the Length/Format dialog. and click Save. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). click OK. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. 17 On the View Control Bar.South. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. model views. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. you mirror all model elements. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. When you mirror a project. such as East . click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. and click OK. for Compressor. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. and annotations in non-drafting views.West or North . ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. under Floor Plans. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. Click the Desktop icon.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for File Name. double-click 01 Entry. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.

under 3D Views. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. right-click. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. select East .West axis. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 5 In the warning dialog.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. Then. select the roof. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. and click OK. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. The project is mirrored along the East . 2 In the drawing area. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. In this exercise. For additional information. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. click OK. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 6 On the Standard toolbar.West. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy.

specify 11:00 AM for time. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting.3 On the View Control Bar. click . Orienting to True North | 449 . click . click the Still tab. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 5 For Sun Position. select Cast Shadows. and select Winter Solstice. and click OK. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM. on the Still tab. and click OK. 11 For Sun Position. select Summer Solstice. For example. click Apply. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 12 Under Date and Time. 10 Under Date and Time. and click OK. click . 8 For Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. click OK. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. When a project is started. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. click OK. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry. the view settings must be set for True North. and select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 15 For Sun Position. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. select True North. click . under Floor Plans. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Properties. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. and click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Orientation. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Still tab. 19 In the Project Browser. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. and click OK. right click 01 Entry. 18 In the Project Browser. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North.

Orienting to True North | 451 . ■ To establish the new direction of True North. click toward the top of the screen. as shown. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view.

click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Orientation. 32 On the View Control Bar.23 In the Project Browser. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. select True North Orientation. select True North. 33 For Sun Position. for Orientation. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 28 In the Project Browser. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. and click OK. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Element Properties. right-click. 27 In the Rename View dialog. enter True North Orientation. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 25 In the Project Browser. select Project North. and click Properties. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click the Still tab. and click OK. under 3D Views. right-click. right-click 01 Entry. right-click 01 Entry. and click Apply.

Click OK. Click Save. In the Length/Format dialog. under Format.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Orienting to True North | 453 . click the Single-Day tab. enter 600 in the first field. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. and click OK. click Summer Solstice. click the Desktop icon. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. for Compressor. For Files of Type. for Dimensions. For File Name. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Los Angeles. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click OK. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. verify that AVI Files is selected.

enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. select Edit/New. for Scheme. select 12/22. For Sun. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. for Date and Time. and click OK. Since a rendered image is temporary. 2 In the Project Browser. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. and click OK. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. under Settings. select Medium. select Interior: Sun only. and click Duplicate. and exporting it as a JPEG image. In this exercise. select Winter Solstice. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. under Quality. under 3D Views. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. 3 On the View Control Bar. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. click Render. Rendered views do not have this limitation. and 2:00 PM. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. (Show Rendering Dialog). 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. under 3D Views. In the Name dialog. for Setting. capturing it. Under Lighting.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson.

For Files of type. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. click Export. click Save to Project. click Desktop. enter living area_winter solstice. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected.6 In the Rendering dialog. and click Save.

456 .

Whether the audience is the general contractor. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. you explore the stylistic approach. advanced model graphics. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. Other tools in the software. length. linework. however. In this series of exercises. a consultant. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model. you can choose between realism and stylistics. and section boxes. sections. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. and details. 457 . They include rendering.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. type. In this tutorial. an outside reviewer. Co-house. When organizing presentation graphics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. For the realistic approach. or the client. elevations. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a copy of the plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a presentation floor plan. To fit the floor plan into the analytique.

and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click 2nd Flr. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. click Training Files.rvt. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click in the drawing area.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst. Cnst. exit the menu. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

sections. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. this represents the view getting smaller. UP Text. 8 Click OK. dimensions. 6 Click the Model Categories tab.rvt. 11 In the Save As directory. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. and clear DOWN Text. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. expand the Stairs category. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. click the Scale control and select 1:100. navigate to the folder of your choice. and Up Arrow. and click Save. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 Under Visibility. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. This turns off the visibility of all tags.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and other annotations in this view. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. No annotations display in the view. elevations. Down Arrow. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460.

click . Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. you can select any city. click . 7 For Place. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. For Sun Position. At that place. ■ For Contrast. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Cnst. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click (Shadows Off). 3 On the View Control Bar. select Sun and Shadow Settings. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. modify. and select 1st Flr. select By Date. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Within a project.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 9 For City. 12 Click OK. click OK. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. select Cast Shadows. MA. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . double-click it in the Project Browser. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. for Date and Time.rvt. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. Time and Place. 6 Under Settings. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you can create. The higher the number. NOTE For this step. If you select a different city. 2 On the View Control Bar. on the Still tab. the darker the shadows. specify 10/27. 1:00 PM. click the Place tab. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Boston. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. specify 35. however.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. . This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click OK. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Sun Position. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. under Settings. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 19 Proceed with the next exercise.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. clear Ground Plane at Level. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.

select Arch Portrait. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click to place it. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. right-click the Design Bar.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. TIP If the View tab is not available. 4 In the Views dialog. The viewport displays at the cursor. click Modify. click Add View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and notice the view title. and click View. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. click Sheet. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 .

click OK. enter Presentation. and click OK. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. under Graphics. for Show Title. 12 In the Name dialog. and click Activate View. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. select No. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click . To accomplish this. For this analytique.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 9 On the Options Bar. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan.

you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. select Invisible lines. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. fill properties. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. When you finish drawing the chain. 18 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click . 22 On the Design Bar. If necessary. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. click . You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click Edit/New. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click Region Properties. and select Chain. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . 20 On the Options Bar. and the boundary of the region.

and click View Properties. for Fill Pattern. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. select Solid fill. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. under Identity Data. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. under Name. scroll down. 25 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 30 On the Design Bar. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. click . 26 In the Type Properties dialog. for Sheet Name. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. under Graphics. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Solid Black. and click OK.24 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Presentation. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. right-click South. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. click in the Walls row. click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Visibility. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Pattern Overrides. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click Override. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. exit the menu. enter Presentation South Elevation. specify 35. specify 2:30 PM. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. right-click Copy of South. 18 For Time. and click Rename. 14 For Sun Position. and click OK. and click OK. under Visibility. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 13 For Contrast. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. scroll up. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 On the View Control Bar. Time and Place. click Duplicate. 12 Under Shadow. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. clear Visible. click .2 In the Project Browser. click in the drawing area. select Cast Shadows. under Settings. under Elevations. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. expand the Doors category. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Name dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 9 Click OK. on the Model Categories tab. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and clear Elevation Swing. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. By changing the angle of the sun. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click (Shadows Off). select By Date.

under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 3 In the Views dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 .rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. click Add View. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise.

5 In the Type Selector. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The view title no longer displays. select Viewport : Presentation.The viewport displays a view title.

You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 9 Proceed with the next lesson. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson.

you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. click Section. for Scale. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. select 1: 100. 3 On the Options Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary.rvt. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 4 Add the section shown below. double-click 1st Flr.

click Callout. To fit correctly in the analytique. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. select 1 : 100. this view needs to be rotated 180°.Section 2 is added to the building model. 7 On the Options Bar. as shown. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. expand Sections (Callout 1). Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . To accomplish this. for Scale. and double-click Section 2.

Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click the Model Categories tab. 10 In the Project Browser. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and click OK. enter Presentation Section 2. under Pattern Overrides. clear Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). and clear Elevation Swing. 15 Under Visibility. double-click Presentation Section 2. scroll up. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. expand the Doors category. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). 17 Under Visibility. click Override. and click OK. right-click Callout of Section 2. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click Modify. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click in the Walls row.

When you select the crop region. (Hide Crop Region). The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. click The crop regions no longer display. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 22 On the View Control Bar. 20 Click OK. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 24 Proceed with the next exercise.

specify the following: Under Shadow.rvt. under Sections (Callout 1). 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the steps that follow. 3 On the View Control Bar. Click Apply. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). For Contrast. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 In the Name dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. double-click Presentation Section 2. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. click Duplicate. ■ For Sun Position. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. in the Project Browser. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify 35. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. The shadows do not offer much contrast. In addition.

click (Shadows On). was added to this training file for training purposes. select Directly. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Click OK. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. For Altitude. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE The line style. Select Relative to View. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. For Azimuth. specify 70°. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. and click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. specify 135°. Silhouette Edges. for Silhouette style. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar.

rvt. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°.Presentation. and click to place the selected view. select Section: Presentation Section 2. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. click Add View.

double-click Section 2. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 6 On the Design Bar. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. 9 On the Edit toolbar. To rotate an object. you click to specify the start radius. The view title no longer displays. click Modify. In the steps that follow. The section needs to be rotated 180°. select Viewport : Presentation. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser.5 In the Type Selector. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. and press Enter. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. click (Rotate). Using a clock as a reference. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise.

Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. under Sheets (all).The callout rotates 180°. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.Presentation. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. and drag it up and to the left as shown. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. After applying the view template to a new section view. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport.

and click Rename. 4 In the View Templates dialog. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation. right-click Section 1.rvt. right-click Copy of Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and click OK. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 3 In the New View Template dialog. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

under Graphics. double-click A105 . 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The furniture. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click OK. lighting fixtures. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click OK. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. click Add View. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select 90° Counterclockwise. select Presentation. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view.Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . and click Deactivate View. and click Add View to Sheet. for Rotation on Sheet.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Names. annotations. 15 Right-click the viewport. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and elevation swings no longer display. 12 In the Views dialog. 18 Right-click the viewport. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In this exercise.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. and click Rename. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. click Callout. select the callout. click Modify. as shown. under Sections (Callout 1). After you add the callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. double-click Section 1.

under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the crop region. and click OK.5 In the Rename View dialog. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . as shown. enter Presentation Callout. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 8 Right-click. under Sections (Callout 1). This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click View Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. double-click Presentation Callout.

For Scale Value 1. select Viewport : Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. Click OK. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Sheets (all).Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. select Section: Presentation Callout. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. click Add View. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 15 On the Design Bar. specify 22. 12 In the Views dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . and click Add View to Sheet. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click A105 . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. select Custom. and click Activate View.

NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. When finished. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. In the steps that follow. click Region Properties. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and move it to the position shown below. and make adjustments as necessary. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. activate the viewport.

click . under Sheets (all). 28 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. When you are finished.25 In the Type Properties dialog. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. click Finish Sketch. and click OK 3 times. for Fill Pattern. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. select Solid fill. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. on the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. double-click A105 .Presentation. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 .

and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click . click (Show Crop Region). 33 On the View Control Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. 32 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the crop region. click Finish Sketch. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.31 On the Options Bar. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . click (Hide Crop Region). 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.35 On the View Control Bar.

3 On the View Control Bar. and apply shadows to the views.rvt. and click 1 : 200. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 On the View Control Bar.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. click the Scale control. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Isometric. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click (Shadows Off). Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.

10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. A section box displays around the building model. 14 In the Project Browser.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under 3D Views. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . For Contrast. right-click Isometric 1. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. For Altitude. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. under 3D Views. specify 35. select Silhouette Edges. under 3D Views. under Extents. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. and click Rename. 12 In the Rename View dialog. click Duplicate. click . select Directly. enter Isometric 1. and click Rename. under 3D Views. Cnst. specify 45°. Select Relative to View. enter Isometric 2. and click OK. for Silhouette style. and click OK. Select Ground Plane at Level. select Section Box. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. double-click Isometric 2. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. For Azimuth. specify 135°. in the list. Click OK. Select 1st Flr. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For Sun Position. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right-click Isometric. and click OK.

Grips display on each face of the section box. as shown. When you are finished. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box.19 Select the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You can use this to rotate the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box.

under 3D Views.Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Next. clear Section Boxes. In the Type Selector. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. If desired. under 3D Views. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 23 In the Rename View dialog. When you are finished. double-click Isometric 3. On the Annotation Categories tab. 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Viewport : Presentation. 25 To hide the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Isometric 2. 31 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. The section box no longer displays. 27 Select the section box. enter Isometric 3. make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. and click Rename. and click OK. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. right-click Isometric 2. the stairs and railings may display. under 3D Views.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. double-click A105 . 29 To hide the section box. you can adjust the plane location. clear Section Boxes. under Sheets (all). click Modify on the Design Bar.

In the Type Selector. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.32 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The filled region partially covers the view. 33 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown.

On the Options Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 36 On the Design Bar. 40 Click OK twice. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. select Concrete. 42 Using the drawing tools. The image below shows the redrawn lines. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. click Edit/New.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Transparent. click Region Properties. 41 On the Design Bar. click Lines. This will make it easier to draw lines. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. 35 Select the poche filled region. and click Activate View. 39 For Background. for Fill Patterns. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 .

click Region Properties. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. click Edit/New. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. for Fill Pattern. 47 On the Design Bar. 46 Click OK twice. click Finish Sketch.43 On the Design Bar. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Solid fill. and click Deactivate View. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save.

After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. you create the final view for the analytique. a cutaway perspective view. you add it to the presentation sheet.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. then you specify the eye direction and range. double-click 1st Flr. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . click Camera. Cnst. The view opens immediately. under Floor Plans. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

for Name. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. select Silhouette Edges. specify the following: Under Shadow. For Sun Position. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. specify 35. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Contrast. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 6 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric.

Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Grips display on each plane of the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. A section box now cuts through the building model. 12 Select the section box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. select Section Box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. under Extents. and click OK.

14 Select the crop region. click (Hide Crop Region).Presentation. 18 On the View Control Bar. under Sheets (all). 21 In the Project Browser. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. double-click A105 . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Viewport : Presentation. 19 To hide the section box. select Scale (locked proportions). under 3D Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK. In the Type Selector. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. click Size. 15 On the Options Bar. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under Change. for Width. 17 Under Model Crop Size. you must specify the actual size of the image. clear Section Boxes. enter 165 mm.

10 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . and click OK. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 6 In the Name dialog. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Text : Title.Presentation sheet is not the active view. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. under Text. and click OK. click . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. enter Description. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. specify a text size of 6 mm. click Text. 3 On the Options Bar. select a font. click Duplicate. and click OK. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Title.rvt. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select the same font as the title. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. specify a text size of 40 mm.

This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 In the Type Selector. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

you create a small building from the front mass form. Once the model has been imported. After you import the SketchUp model. 507 . In this tutorial. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. curtain walls.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. and roofs. such as walls. that compose the building. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. you can easily add detail with Revit components.

Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 4 In the New Project dialog. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. click Create Mass. select Auto-Detect. 9 In the informational dialog. under Template file. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Click the Sketchup file. select SketchUp Files. visible elements. Double-click the Common folder. and click OK. for File name. right-click in the Design Bar. click Training Files. you create a Revit Architecture project. 10 In the Name dialog. click OK. and not in the library. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 6 In the Save As dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. For Colors. enter SketchUp Model. select Preserve. click the Massing tab. click Browse. For Import units. For Files of type. For Layers. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project.rte. enter Import SketchUp. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. or select from a list. click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. buildings. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. select All. and click Save.skp. 2 In the New Project dialog.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family.

An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. click . For Place at level.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. Level 1 is the only choice. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. Click Open. In a new project. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. depending on the complexity of the project. click Finish Mass. select Level 1. click the Close button. 14 On the View toolbar. select Manual . such as walls.Center. 17 In the warning dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. and roofs. curtain walls. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. ■ ■ For Positioning.

4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. and roofs. such as walls.400mm displays. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . select the face so that it highlights in red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. verify Basic Roof: Generic . that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. click Roof by Face. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. verify Level 2 is selected. for Level. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. After you create the building from the mass faces. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. curtain walls. and on the View Control Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.18 Proceed to the next exercise.

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. verify that Select Multiple is selected. on the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. click Create Roof. 6 On the Options Bar. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. on the View toolbar. click to display masses. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. To see the new roof. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

click Create Roof. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof by Face. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click roofs that you created. 21 On the Design Bar.15 On the Design Bar. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Modify to end the command. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click Wall by Face. 23 On the Options Bar. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass.200mm displays. 22 In the Type Selector. for Loc Line. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 16 On the View toolbar. select Core Face: Exterior. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar.

verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 26 Click to redisplay the masses.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 28 In the Type Selector. click to view only the walls and roofs. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 25 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System by Face. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.30 On the Options Bar. 31 Using the same technique. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . click Create System. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below.

click Wall by Face. click Roof by Face. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. 38 Select the mass face shown below. click Curtain System. and select it. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Create System. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. press TAB until the desired wall highlights.35 On the Design Bar. select the other wall.

double-click Level 1. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and select the mass face shown below. Below the right corner of the view. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 42 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . click Wall by Face. click to view the building that you have created.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera. click Camera. 43 Click to redisplay the masses.

to view only the walls.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. specify a point for the camera target. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. Click the frame to display its grips. 48 On the View toolbar. click your building in the view. as shown. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. The perspective view created by the camera displays. roofs.

for Justification.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. click . Under Grid 1 Pattern. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . select Center. click Modify. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 50 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Under Grid 2 Pattern. and select the left curtain system in the view. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. for Justification. select Center.

and click Cancel to end the command. 59 On the View toolbar. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser.54 Select each roof to display its grips. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. under 3D Views. and move the roof edges as shown below. 55 Right-click. 56 In the Project Browser. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Door. 63 In the Type Selector.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you need to change the length of the wall. grid lines. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you create a curtain system using the wall command. For example. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Like walls. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. and mullions. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you select the grid. Flat Curtain System In this lesson.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. and you can change these elements individually. panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To change grids. 525 . This affects the entire curtain system.rvt. click Training Files. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. you need to select a panel. or you can use a specific curtain system command. to resize the system. To switch panel types. and they are not windows. Like windows. Unlike windows.

4 In the Type Selector. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and double-click Ground Floor.1 In the Project Browser. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. click Wall. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. Creating an Entrance | 527 .

top and base attachments. and click (Properties). select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. enter 1200. Click OK. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.11 Select the curtain system. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. using curtain grids. top constraint. For Top Offset. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. and room bounding.

and click OK.a. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. right-click Elevation 1 . click Modify. and resize the crop boundary as shown. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Elevation. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. under Floor Plans. 25 On the Design Bar. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 529 . and click Rename. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click OK. 33 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. click Curtain Grid. while pressing CTRL. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. FIFTH FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. select SECOND FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR.26 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and SEVENTH FLOOR. Click to place another grid line. one larger than the other. Click to create a vertical grid. FOURTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. click Modify. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. THIRD FLOOR.

35 Select the left vertical grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and on the Options Bar. and then select the segment above it. you add a doorway to the curtain system. The segment line style changes to dashed. Creating an Entrance | 531 . 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Instead of using the Door command. click Add or Remove Segments.Next. The two segments are removed. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.

42 Place dimensions as shown. click Curtain Grid. 39 On the Design Bar.38 Using the same method. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. and lock them. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar. select One Segment. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.

The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Use the following image as a guide. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 43 Delete the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. Creating an Entrance | 533 . click in any white space to exit the editor. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.

53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 55 In the Project Browser. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 56 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. . You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 54 On the Design Bar. These panels schedule as doors. and click Wireframe. click view. 57 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel.rfa. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. on the new curtain system you added.Next. Now. click Modify. double-click Entrance Elevation. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 52 On the Type Selector. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. They are part of the curtain panel category. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. The panel changes to a double door. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. not as curtain panels. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click Training Files.

click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 62 In the Element Properties dialog.60 On the Type Selector. 61 With the panel still selected. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click System Panel : Solid. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 63 Click OK twice. The glazed panels display in blue. 65 On the View Control Bar. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click . 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe.

select Entire Grid Line. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Save As. click Mullion. select Grid Line Segment. 4 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .rvt.68 On the File menu.

You are going to change some mullion joins. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . clickModify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 10 Delete the mullions below them. so you remove them next. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. there are a few that you do not want.6 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. however.

This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you can also right-click.Two mullion join controls display. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 17 Save the file. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Finally. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Southeast Isometric. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 15 On the Design Bar. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 14 Click the top mullion control. click Modify.

6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. For Top Offset. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. enter 1200. Curved Curtain System | 539 . select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Finally. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 4 In the Type Selector. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 7 On the Options Bar. (Arc passing through three points). click Wall. Click OK. for Top Constraint. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc.

12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then sixteenths. double-click East. click Curtain Grid.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. eighths. Divide the halves into quarters. Next. you place grids on the system. under Elevations. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed.

This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system.300mm. click Modify. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. Next. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. select the bottom layer of panels. select Basic Wall: Generic . Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. to filter out all 19 Save the file. you change some panels in the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 .

for Depth. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. . 6 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. click Training Files. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 12 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. and click . click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. clear Chain. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel.rft. enter 100. click Model Lines. click . select Glass. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar.

21 In the Type Selector. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 23 Right-click. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close.14 On the Design Bar. right-click. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 24 On the View toolbar.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. click 25 On the View toolbar. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. All fourth floor panels are selected. and save the family as Curtain Panel .rfa family. select Curtain Panel . click Modify. double-click FOURTH FLOOR.Pattern. click (Default 3D View). 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. and click Change Walls Orientation. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and return to the project file. (SteeringWheels).Pattern.rfa.

This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 30 Save the file. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. 27 In the Project Browser. right-click. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel.Solid. All fifth floor panels are selected. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 29 In the Type Selector. All the panels change to the solid panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. select System Panel . double-click FIFTH FLOOR.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. under Floor Plans.

click ■ ■ For Sides. and enter 50 mm for the radius. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. For vertical mullions. select Mullion. 8 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click East. Click again to specify the ending point. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . click Training Files. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. enter 8. Select Radius. click Mullion. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.rft. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. for Profile Usage. under Elevations.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. . 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). and select it. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 27 In the Project Browser. clear Coarse and Medium. click Training Files. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Fine. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click (SteeringWheels). click Modify.11 On the Design Bar.rfa family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 19 On the Design Bar. click Mullion. click Visibility. 13 On the Options Bar. 31 Click . click Detail Component. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click Modify. 20 Select the detail component. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. it can be added as a mullion type. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.rfa. After the new profile is loaded. and click Visibility. under 3D Views. 28 On the View toolbar. and return to the project file. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. and click OK. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. double-click Southeast Isometric. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.detail.

42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. click Modify. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 33 Click Edit/New. and click OK. 37 Click OK twice.32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 36 Under Construction. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 41 In the Project Browser. right-click. 38 On the Options Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Duplicate. 44 Save the file. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 43 Press DELETE. You have placed more mullions than you want. 40 On the Design Bar. for Profile. select Circular Mullion for Family. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. select All Empty Segments. under Floor Plans. so you remove the unwanted ones.

double-click TOP OF ROOF. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. select Defines slope.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and a ruled curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. All the inside faces highlight. 1 In the Project Browser. and press TAB. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. a storefront system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this lesson. TIP To chain select all the walls. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 4 On the Design Bar. and you can click to select them all. make custom curtain panels and mullions. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

double-click Southeast Isometric. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 9 On the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 10 In the Project Browser. select Entire Grid Line. under 3D Views. 14 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Finish Roof. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 600. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Mullion. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 18 Save the file.7 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties.

6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. click Wall.Storefront System In this exercise. select Unconnected for Height. 5 On the Options Bar. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. under Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 4 In the Type Selector. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. and enter 2400. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.

and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. under 3D Views. and press ENTER. For this wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click the temporary dimension. click Edit/New. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 9 On the Design Bar. which is specified in the type. Storefront System | 551 . double-click Southeast Isometric. enter 10200 mm. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. To see how the grid layout is defined. 10 In the Project Browser.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 12 Select the storefront wall. and click . The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. even if the wall height changes. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. click Modify. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm.

see the Revit Architecture help. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. center. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. Angle. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 18 On the Options Bar. enter 15. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 20 Save the file. you find Number. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. click Mullion. under 3D Views. 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Select a curtain grid. Justification. and Offset. By setting the Angle value. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 16 Click OK. In this exercise. double-click Southeast Isometric. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. or end. select All Empty Segments. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle.

making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 Click the highlighted line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line.3 On the View Control Bar. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. and highlight the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level.

10 Select the panel. Next. and click . 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid.8 Select the highlighted line. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 9 On the Design Bar. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Modify. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A panel between the 2 lines is created.

In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 16 In the Type Selector. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. and define a ruled curtain system. select System Panel : Solid. right-click. quarters. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 18 Save the file. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. Finally. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. and then eighths. quarters. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and then eighths. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. Curtain System by Lines | 555 .

556 .

In addition. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. mansard. You do not need to create the work plane. shed. gutters. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this exercise.Roofs 15 In this lesson. and soffits to the roofs that you create. 557 . Before you can sketch the roof profile. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. gable. including hip. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Roofs. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. click Training Files. and low sloped roofs. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In this tutorial. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn how to add fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Ref Plane. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. and so on). 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. select Name. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. expand Views (all). you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 4 Click OK. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the blue square on the witness line. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. expand Floor Plans. centerline.1 In the Project Browser. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.

11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the roof profile. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Lines.Next. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 16 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. select Chain.

Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. press CTRL. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. press TAB. and select the second wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Next. click Modify. expand Sections (Type 1). so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. and then select the exterior face of the wall. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 18 Select the edge of the roof. expand Views (all). and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 21 In the Project Browser. The roof should resemble the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

26 On the View toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.24 On the Options Bar. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click model. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. and click Yes. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. verify that Defines slope is selected. 3 In the Project Browser. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.rvt. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . and enter 600 for Overhang. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. sketch the roof footprint. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 5 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls.

and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. click the model. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 When you see the informational dialog. Next. select both slope definition lines. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Finish Roof. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 15 On the View toolbar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 11 Press CTRL. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. By default. 13 On the Design Bar. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Properties). under Dimensions. 8 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. and enter 600 for Overhang.rvt. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. When you complete the roof. clear Defines slope. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. press TAB. m_Roofs.

9 Using automatic snaps. 15 On the Options bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click (Rectangle). click Modify. 10 On the View menu. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Defines Slope. 17 When you see the informational dialog. sketch the chimney opening. click Lines. Next. click Finish Roof. add new slope lines to the roof.6 Click to select all the walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 8 On the Options Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 13 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 600 for Overhang. select Defines slope. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Roofs. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model.18 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans.

close the roof sketch. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Next. select the left vertical slope definition line. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. click (Trim/Extend). clear Defines Slope. Next. using the following illustration for guidance. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 9 On the Tools toolbar. and click (Pick Lines). verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click Lines.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 14 Under Constraints. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click (SteeringWheels). 16 On the View toolbar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 17 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click Modify. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. Next. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 18 On the Design Bar. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Finish Roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 22 Using the same method that you used previously.21 Click (SteeringWheels). 25 Proceed to the next exercise. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 23 On the Tools toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.

trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. select the left vertical roof line. and enter 300 for Overhang. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. enter 0 for Overhang.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.rvt. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . 9 On the Options Bar. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Next. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. m_Roofs. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. press TAB. clear Defines Slope. 10 To trim the first line segment. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and double-click Level 2. click Pick Walls. click (Trim/Extend). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.

(SteeringWheels). Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 Under Constraints. and press ENTER. click 20 On the View toolbar. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 19 On the View toolbar. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. select Defines slope. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. m_Roofs. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. expand Views (all). Next. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.rvt. you add a slope-defining line. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and double-click 3D. click Roof Properties. 1 In the Project Browser. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand 3D Views. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. you need to add two reference planes. To help locate the position of each split. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. click (Pick Lines). 5 On the View menu. expand Views (all). add two new slope arrows. Next. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 4 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and double-click Level 2. click Split Walls and Lines. 11 On the Design Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. Before you can add slope arrows. click Slope Arrow. 7 On the Options Bar. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Next. and enter 600 for Offset. 9 On the Tools menu. clear Defines Slope.

you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. select Slope for Specify. and click 19 Under Constraints. and then click OK. and move the cursor to place the arrow. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 500 for Rise/1000. click Modify. 18 Press CTRL. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. expand Views (all). and double-click Garage Roof. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. expand Floor Plans.15 to add the second slope arrow. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 16 Repeat steps 13 . 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When eave heights differ. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 20 Under Dimensions. click Edit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you sketch a hip roof. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. (Properties). 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. select both slope arrows. m_Roofs. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. the adjacent eave heights must align.

15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. on the File menu. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. select a method to align the eaves. 14 If you want to save your changes. on the Options Bar. 5 On the Options Bar.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 13 On the View toolbar. (Properties). 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click Align Eaves. and click OK. When aligning eaves. click Save As. 10 On the Options Bar. under Dimensions. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. select Defines Slope. 12 On the Design Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. click Finish Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. The eave lines display with a dimension.

Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 3 Select the roof and. expand Views (all). expand Elevations. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. on the Options Bar. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. and double-click North. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. (Properties). under Constraints. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

under Dimensions. and double-click Level 3. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click (Pick Lines). click . create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and click OK. click Modify. and select the remaining three lines. click Finish Roof. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines.6 On the View toolbar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . 14 On the Options Bar. Next. and then select Defines slope. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. press TAB. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines.

20 Proceed to the next exercise. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add a roof to a building shell.17 On the View toolbar.rvt. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. After you add the roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click Training Files. click mansard roof. click Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the File menu. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.

5 In the drawing area. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Options Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. verify that Defines slope is not selected. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

Insulation on Metal Deck . 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . for Type.EPDM. and click OK. 7 On the Tools toolbar. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. select Steel Truss . click Finish Roof. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties.Because the walls are not continuous. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend).

double-click Roof. The roof has been created. 16 On the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. click (Draw Split Lines). under Floor Plans. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. double-click the section head to open the section view. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. In the next steps. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout.

and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 18 Move the cursor down. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. move the cursor horizontally to the left.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 20 Using the same method. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

click (Modify Sub-Elements). You modify the points individually. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. Next. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . (Add points). on the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. In this exercise. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. 23 On the Options Bar.

enter -2''. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 25 Using the same method. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. and press ENTER. click (Modify Sub-Elements). Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. for the dimension.

enter 4''. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 29 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. including the interior edges of the roof regions. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the roof slab. and on the Options Bar. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. click Modify. and select all of the roof edges.27 Press and hold CTRL. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. for Elevation. click (Properties).

for the Thermal/Air Layer. under Construction. and Soffits on page 586. for Structure. you can easily create its fascia. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Edit. 39 Proceed to the next lesson.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. By making the insulation layer variable. 37 If you want to save your changes. and soffits in Revit Architecture. click Edit/New. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. you learn how to create roof fascia. 35 Click OK 3 times. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. The entire slab is sloped. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Fascia. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. In some cases this type of slope is desired. on the File menu. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Gutters. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. select Variable. gutters. 36 View the results in the section view. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. Gutters. and soffits. Creating Fascia. After you create a roof. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. and Soffits In this lesson. gutters.

4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. click Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 8 In the Name dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Condominium. enter Built-up Fascia. and click OK twice.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 3 Press CTRL. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. under Construction. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and click OK.rfa. click (Properties). click Training Files.

11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 13 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Properties). c_Condominium. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 2 On the Options Bar. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. Creating Gutters on page 588. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.

Creating Soffits on page 590. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Material. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. under Construction. click Duplicate. and click OK three times. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. . select Metal-Aluminum for Name. and click OK.3 In the Properties dialog. 10 Click to place the gutter. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. Creating Gutters | 589 .

click Pick Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.Creating Soffits In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Roof. expand Views. c_Condominium. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you learn how to place a roof soffit. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and then select the soffit to join them.4 Select the roof. Creating Soffits | 591 . click Finish Sketch. 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). click Join Geometry. and double-click 3D. 7 On the Tools menu. 8 Select the roof.

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. on the File menu.9 If you want to save your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name.

select Square meters. For Unit Suffix. Finally. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. 2 In the Project Units dialog. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. and open Common\c_Area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. 593 . select Millimeters. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. click Project Units. In the final exercise. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. click Training Files. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu.rvt. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. If you are using metric units. under Length. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. 3 Under Area. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. select mm. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. your values will be different.

expand Views (all). 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click Cancel. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. click the Area Schemes tab. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. select m2. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .■ ■ ■ For Rounding. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. and click Room and Area. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. These schemes define spatial relationships. click OK. click the Room Calculations tab. select 2 decimal places. the system-computed height defaults to the level. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. For Unit Suffix. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. right-click in the Design Bar. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. click Settings. expand Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. Click OK. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. it is not necessary in this exercise. or 0.

Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. When you select Yes in this dialog. click Area Plan. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you must select one of the reference lines. To modify the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. click Area. rather than the area tag. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Click OK. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you must manually add these boundary lines. 12 When the informational dialog displays. under Views (all). 13 In the Project Browser. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. If you select No. forming a closed loop. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building).

Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. If you do not select this option. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. click Area Plan. Next. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. When you add area boundary lines. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. click Area Boundary. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. and store area. you can either draw them or pick them. Click OK. common areas. 21 On the Options Bar. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. When you pick the walls. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected.

and click to select the area.23 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click Modify. click ■ ■ . 27 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Area.

click ■ ■ ■ . 29 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 31 On the Design Bar. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click Area. 32 On the Options Bar. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. Click OK. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area.■ Click OK. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name.

■ Click OK. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. enter Core for Name. and select Store Area for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.

38 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. and click Save.rvt. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click Color Scheme Legend. click Save. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.Notice that within the two store areas. In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In the next exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 37 On the File menu. and click to place the legend. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

7 Under Available fields. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . select Area Type and click Add. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. and click OK. under Category. select Areas (Rentable). click Schedule/Quantities. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog.3 When the dialog displays. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.

9 Click OK. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. 603 . you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. floors. After creating mass floors.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. roofs. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. After you make building elements. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. In this tutorial. volume. If you modify a massing face. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you then need to update the building face. curtain systems. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. or both. You assign the default wall. building elements. and floors. and perimeter information. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. and roofs. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. At any time. floor.

click Create Mass. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. under Views (all). 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. click Training Files. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. and cutting geometry. 5 On the Design Bar. sweeps. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. and click Massing. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 1.

enter 25000. select Mass (Opaque). click (Default 3D View). under Materials and Finishes. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click Lines. under Views (all). 8 On the Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. and on the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. (Pick Lines). and click OK. click the value for Material. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View toolbar. and click . enter 1550 mm. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. for Offset. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click Extrusion Properties. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for Extrusion End. click 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. for Name. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK. (Line).6 On the Sketch Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch.

click Extrusion Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. highlight the larger form. 23 In the Materials dialog. select Pick a plane. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click {3D} to see the results. and click OK. for Extrusion End. for Extrusion Start. 28 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Project Browser. 30 In the drawing area. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. TIP If necessary. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 27500. click the value for Material. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. under Views (all). select Mass (Transparent). Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. and click . for Name. 21 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. under Views (all). click Finish Sketch. enter 25000. The second form is on top of the first form. double-click West. and click OK. press TAB to highlight the entire face.

you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. and on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . click (Draw). and click to select the line start point. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. click Lines. 37 On the Options Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. (Pick Lines). Next.31 Click to select the face. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Arc passing through three points). and clear Chain.

on the Options Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). 46 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click Lines and. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. click Edit Top. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click the arrow next to the drawing options. and delete the vertical construction line. (Line). 45 In the Project Browser. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click (Move). 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click East.TIP If you do not see this option.

you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.48 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click 49 Create an arc as shown. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 52 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Blend Properties. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. In the next exercise. click (Default 3D View). verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. for Material. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . (Arc passing through three points). 54 Proceed to the next exercise. 53 On the View toolbar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. In this exercise.

2 In the drawing area. m_Massing_Start. 9 On the Design Bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click (Line). and select Chain. under Views (all).rvt. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing .Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. select the mass. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 10 On the Options Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Lines. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 7 Using the same technique.

you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. click Finish Sketch. 13 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. snap the corners to the intersections. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 17 On the View toolbar. 15 Click OK. 14 Under Constraints. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. When sketching each extrusion. for Extrusion End.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. enter 0. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. In this exercise. click (Default 3D View). and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. on the View Control Bar. click Extrusion Properties. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap.

■ For the radius. double-click Level 1. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans. and click Lines. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. m_Massing_Start. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. click Sketch 2D Path.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. select a point below the mass elements. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points).

Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. click (Default 3D View). 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click Profile 1. click Lines. verify that <By Sketch> is selected.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. click (Rectangle). and click Edit. 6 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . The only way to align these elements is visually. 11 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path.

sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. click (Align). 15 On the Design Bar.13 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Profile. 17 Using the same method. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. click Profile 2. and press ESC.

and click . under Materials and Finishes. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Finish Swept Blend. Using Swept Blends | 615 . select Mass (Transparent). 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. 23 On the Design Bar. click <By Category>. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile.18 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties.

25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.rvt. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. click Finish Mass. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. In this exercise. Finally.24 On the Design Bar. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you create new family types from a mass family file. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.

enter 18000 mm. enter 6000 mm. for Height. enter 68000 mm. under Other. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for Depth. In this exercise. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and click OK. for Width.rfa. and click Apply. and click Apply. enter 9000 mm. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. click Family Types. 3 In the Name dialog. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Height. for Height. 7 Click New. enter 11000 mm. for Depth. enter 15000mm. and click Apply. 5 Click New. 9 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Name. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 For Width. and click OK. for Depth. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. and for Name. enter 12000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. 6 For Width. and click OK. enter 46000mm. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 18000 mm. click New. 4 In the Family Types dialog.

TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. Semi Barrel Vault. 6 Open the Box-Training. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rfa family files. 1 If not already selected. as shown. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and Triangle. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 3 On the View Control Bar. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Site. 8 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. click Place Mass. You also load other existing mass families and place them. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. on the View toolbar.rfa.rfa.rfa. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click Training Files. Arc Dome.

specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. 25 In the drawing area. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for the Material parameter. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 21 On the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select the triangle. and click OK twice. click (Element Properties). 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 17 Press CTRL. 14 In the Type Selector. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . click Place Mass. click Modify. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. as shown. click Place Mass. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. enter 90 for Angle. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rotate after placement. click Modify. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 11 Select the box. and click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Opaque). and click to place the mass. select the 3 boxes. and click OK twice.

and click OK twice. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.26 Select the triangle. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. specify Mass (Transparent). 30 Place the box mass family as shown. and click (Element Properties). 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . for the Material parameter. 29 In the Type Selector. click (Default 3D View). for the Material parameter. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). click Place Mass. specify Mass (Opaque). 33 On the View toolbar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice.

(Join Geometry).Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. In this exercise. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click (Default 3D View). NOTE When you join geometry. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise.rvt file. In the next exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you join these mass elements. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.

4 Select the triangle. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. click (Mirror).3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. on the Edit toolbar. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.

11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. click (Draw). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. (Join Geometry). enter SM. as shown. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. for Axis. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar.8 On the Options Bar. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the triangle. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 17 Press ESC to see the result. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . click (Default 3D View).

624 | Chapter 17 Massing . and select the triangle mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. 2 On the Window menu. 1 On the Design Bar.rvt. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. click (Add to Design Option Set). Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. do not clear the check mark. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. you joined mass elements together. click Modify. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. (If Design Options is already selected.In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place.

9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. clear Curved. 13 On the Design Bar. select Sloped (primary). Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 8 On the Options Bar. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click Place Mass. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. click Modify. and click (Element Properties). 14 In the drawing area. enter 90. specify Mass (Transparent). 17 In the Type Selector. for Angle. for the Material parameter. double-click Site. 5 In the Project Browser. select Rotate after placement.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. and click OK twice. 10 On the Options Bar. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 7 In the Type Selector. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. and click (Element Properties). 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . specify Mass (Transparent). While pressing CTRL.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. and click OK. under 3D Views. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Modify. 20 In the drawing area. 23 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. click (Add to Design Option Set). click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. clear Sloped. under Views (all). TIP To find the correct shapes. double-click {3D}. 28 In the Project Browser. select Curved. select the three arc domes. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and watch the status bar. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. for the Material parameter. 22 In the Project Browser. double-click North. and click OK twice. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. you can make it the primary option. click (Design Options).29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Make Primary. and click OK. under Option. and click Close.rvt. 31 Click the value for Design Option. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Curved and. click the Design Options tab. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . select Curved from the Design Option menu. 33 In the Design Options dialog. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 35 On the File menu. you placed mass elements into Design Options. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 34 Close the warning that displays. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.

click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click Wall by Face. select Wall Centerline.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Training Files.rvt. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click {3D}. 5 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you pick massing faces to create walls. click (Pick Faces).Brick on CMU. 2 On the View toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. and for Loc Line. under Views (all).

11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 5. double-click Level 3. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 15 On the Design Bar. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 16 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Wall by Face. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. double-click Level 1. 8 In the Project Browser. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face.

23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 21 On the Design Bar. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. under Floor Plans. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. click Wall by Face.18 Select all the faces shown in red. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 20 On the View Control Bar. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . you can select the overlapping curtain wall. double-click Level 9. If desired. under Views (all). 19 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

and click OK. click Modify. click Mass Floors. volume. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. and exterior surface area. When you select levels. perimeter. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. select all levels. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Click OK.In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. clear Curtain Panels. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1.rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 In the Project Browser. Curtain Systems. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. and Walls. 8 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. and click OK. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing .9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 10 Press CTRL. 11 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. 13 On the Design Bar. select Levels 1-4. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown.

NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Level 1. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 15 Press CTRL.14 On the Options Bar.

add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. press and hold SHIFT. under Category. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 4 Using the same method. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. Floor Perimeter. Floor Volume. and click Add. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.In this exercise. and click OK. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Available fields. select Mass Floor. The Floor Area. and select Level. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. select Floor Area. schedules can be created using the mass floors.rvt. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects.

for Sort by. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. enter Retail. select Mass: Family and Type.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. for Usage. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. and click OK. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 .

14 Select Level. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. for Fields. After you assign usage. expand Schedules/Quantities. 13 With Usage selected. under Other. and click Properties. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Edit. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. under Scheduled fields (in order). 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. select Mass: Family and Type. and click Remove.

22 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. 19 Click OK twice. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level. and plan views. enter Hotel. for Then by. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). for Field formatting. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 23 In the Rename View dialog. click Edit. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. for Filter by. in the field under Filter by. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 .15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Usage. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 18 On the Filter tab. and click Rename. under Fields. click Edit. select Calculate totals. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 27 Click OK twice. under Other. and in the field below. for Sort by. for Filter. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Floor Area. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. under Other. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Formatting tab. and click OK. for Filter. elevation. and select Grand totals. select Usage.

you created mass floor schedules. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. you pick massing faces to create roofs. click Roof by Face.rvt. the floor area. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. The mass floor schedules list.In this exercise. under Views (all). floor perimeter. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click {3D}. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. by level.

click Create Roof.4 In the Type Selector.400mm. Your model should now look as shown. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 5 On the Options Bar. select Basic Roof : Generic . This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.8 Using the method you just learned. 13 Using the same method. Curtain Systems. In this exercise. select Curtain Panels. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. and Walls. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. in the Type Selector. click Create Roof.

5 Press CTRL. 6 On the Options Bar. click Create System.rvt. double-click {3D}. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . 3 In the Type Selector. click Curtain System by Face. 4 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

7 Using the same method. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 11 Using the same method.9 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass).

you change the size of an existing mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. In this exercise. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. and click (Element Properties). 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.1 In the Project Browser. Next. click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. Floors. double-click Site. and click OK. under Views (all). for Width. Curtain Systems. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. clear Curtain Panels. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and Walls. enter 30000. clear Exclude Design Options. and then click OK. Roofs. 2 On the View menu.

13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. under Floor Plans. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Level 1. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . click (Default 3D View). 16 On the View toolbar. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. Also. you want to select the smaller one.TIP To select the curtain wall. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 Select the roof as shown. click Remake. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog.

648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. and click Remake. click Remake.18 On the Options Bar.

click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.20 In the Project Browser. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . under Schedules/Quantities. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 Open the 3D view. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. In this exercise. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you changed the size of an existing mass family.

6 On the Model Categories tab. right-click {3D}. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . click All to select all categories. 8 Click None to clear the selection. and click OK. 9 Select Mass. 4 Rename the view 3D . 3 In the Project Browser.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. under 3D Views.Massing only. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. You might create the model shown. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 .In this exercise. This concludes the massing tutorial. such as columns and an extruded roof. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. to the building shell. If desired.

652 .

when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. In this exercise. hotel rooms. In another exercise. you not only simplify their placement. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. In this tutorial. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. 653 . you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. The new group is considered nested within the host group. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. Modifying. Creating.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. place. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. or with those working on a different project. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. You can also nest groups within other groups. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. the host group is also updated automatically. By grouping objects. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and typical office layouts. you add the new model group to a previously created group. After you create a model group. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. You mirror one instance of the group. For example. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. When you make changes to a nested group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and modify repetitive units. you also simplify the modification process. all instances in the building model are updated.

enter ZR. expand Views (all). and double-click First Floor. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. expand Floor Plans. 2 Click in the drawing area. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. click Training Files.rvt. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.

Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar.

expand Model. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. click Modify. and click Create Instance. right-click Typical Kitchen. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. under Groups.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). clear Copy. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.14 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .

You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. as shown. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and one rotated. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. click Modify. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

click Save As. you make changes to an instance of a group. Modifying a Group | 661 .rvt. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Modifying a Group In this exercise. press TAB to highlight the wall. When you finish editing. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. and click to select it.

Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping .). 7 Click (Group Member. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. click Modify. press TAB. press TAB. 8 On the Design Bar.). NOTE To display an excluded element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the door.). select the element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.3 Click (Group Member. and click member to group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door.

14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 10 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Wall. move the cursor to the left. Modifying a Group | 663 .127mm. click Modify. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Door. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. clear Tag on Placement. 12 On the Design Bar.

The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. In edit group mode. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 21 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. 23 In the drawing area. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. All other elements in the model are grayed out.17 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. click Modify.

All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Finish. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. which acts as the host. enter 2134. enter 1000. click Modify. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. and click OK. (Element Properties). all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. created in an earlier lesson. click 28 For Base Offset.25 On the Design Bar. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 29 On the group editor toolbar. Nesting Groups | 665 . and on the Options Bar. for Unconnected Height. 26 Select the opening. under Constraints. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add the Typical Kitchen group.

under Floor Plans. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor. 5 In the drawing area. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.rvt. in the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. click (Add to Group). select the Typical Kitchen group. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click Edit Group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

8 In the Project Browser. select the wall between the folding doors. double-click Second Floor. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish.6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. 7 On the group editor toolbar. Nesting Groups | 667 . Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors.

Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. such as door and window tags. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. double-click First Floor.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. you add door tags to a group. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. under Floor Plans. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. such as text. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . In the next exercise. and filled regions.

5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Finish Sketch.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click to draw a rectangular region. and select a point below the left elevator.

11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click OK. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click to add an arc leader. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Enter Tile.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Edit toolbar. and select the text note and the filled region. and on the Design Bar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Modify. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Text. as shown. click (Group). 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 9 On the Options Bar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.

right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Floor Plans. 20 In the Project Browser. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. expand Detail. Because the detail group contains variables. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Groups. double-click Second Floor. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . 24 Click File menu ➤ Save.18 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance.

Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. double-click First Floor. clear Leader. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. as shown.manner that a drawing component can be added. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 3 On the Options Bar.

click (Group). click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans.7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . and click OK. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. select Door Tags. 9 On the Edit toolbar. for Attached Detail Group Name. and click OK. 8 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. double-click Second Floor. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags.

NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 14 On the Options Bar.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. therefore. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. click Place Detail. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 16 On the Design Bar. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. and click OK. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

select 2 Bedroom Unit. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . click Modify. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. expand Groups. verify that Project is selected. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save Group. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.rvt. click OK. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. for Create new. and click OK. 3 For File name. In this case.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. browse to the Desktop. accept the default template file. verify that Same as group name is selected. and expand Model. 12 On the Design Bar. A warning dialog displays. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Open. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the New Project dialog. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click Save. under Groups\Model. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). and click Create Instance. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. click Desktop.

18 In the Project Browser. click Link. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Remove Link. expand Revit Links. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Modify. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Use Existing. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. verify that Attached Details is selected only. select the linked Revit model. 24 In the message dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.rvt file is added as a link to the project. and on the Options Bar. and the link is removed. click OK. click Bind. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. When a group is converted to a link. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and click OK. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.rvt. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.

677 . you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. islands. In the final exercises. Using Site Tools In this lesson. convert the data to a table. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. and walkways. You add property lines manually. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you add a building pad to the site.Site 19 In this tutorial. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. and then modify the data. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.

you create a toposurface using two different methods. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . and double-click Site. This project file was created using the default metric template. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm.rvt. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and open Metric\m_First_Project. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise. expand Views (all). click Toposurface. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. and click Site. Using the first method. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 4 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. click Point. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Use the following illustration as a reference. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.

click Finish Surface.8 On the Options Bar. click Site Settings. under Increment. 12 On the Settings menu. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 15000mm. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. Use the following illustration as a reference. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. and 18000mm absolute elevations. and click OK. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. under Additional Contours. 12000mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . enter 1500mm.

click to delete it. 14 On the View toolbar. Before importing the contour data. 18 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). click to view it at various angles.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. on the Standard toolbar. enter 1000mm. and double-click South. modify the level names and elevations. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click the elevation value. 15 On the View Control Bar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. under Views (all). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . click Modify. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

For Layers. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Click Open. and click OK. rename the level Base Site Elevation. select Specify. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. under Floor Plans. For Colors. click Yes. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. select Preserve. Verify that Current view only is not selected. it is considered an import symbol.21 Click the Level 2 text. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. rename the level Basement. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 24 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). Until it is exploded. 30 On the Edit menu. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 29 Select the imported topography. and press ENTER. double-click Site. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. and press ENTER. click Pin Position. click Training Files.

32 On the View menu. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear C_INDX. 36 On the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . and click OK. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. when the edges highlight. and then click OK. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. select it. 34 Under Visibility. When you select the import symbol. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points.31 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear Elevations.

45 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. click Finish Surface. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. name the project Site-in progress. 40 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Property Lines on page 684. you add property lines using two methods. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 42 On the View toolbar. and click Save. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . click (Default 3D View). 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (SteeringWheels). 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Using the second method. Using the first method. 39 On the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state.

do so before continuing. 4 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. and click OK. click Lines. Click Modify. On the Design Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. click Lines. click Property Line. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. under Floor Plans.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Select and delete the right vertical line. Adding Property Lines | 685 . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Site-in progress. select Create property lines by sketching.

click Finish Sketch. select Edit Table. 8 On the Options Bar. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . click 12 On the Design Bar. A warning dialog is displayed. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. when they highlight. click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. click OK. add an arc line on the right. and click OK.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. select the lines. click Property Line. on the Standard toolbar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. to delete them. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 9 In the warning dialog. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.

19 In the Tags dialog. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 15 Starting in Row #1. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.14 In the Property Lines dialog. click to place the property lines. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 16 Click OK. If the gap is not closed. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.

clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. and click Drafting. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. In the final step. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . and click OK. click Training Files. 27 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 23 On the View menu. In the next exercise.20 Click Load. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 In the Tags dialog. Before adding property line segment tags. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. clear Leader. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rfa.dwg and click OK. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. click Visibility/Graphics. 30 On the View Control Bar. click the Imported Categories tab. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. In this exercise. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 25 Under Visibility. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click to place it. click Tag ➤ By Category. this project file is required in its current state. you created two sets of property lines. The tags display more prominently in this view. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar.0mm. click New. 10 Under Additional Contours. select Single Value. select a shade of Brown. select Working Contour. Under Line Pattern. Under Subcategory. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. click Object Styles. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. 7 Click OK. Under Line Color. enter the name Working Contour. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . for Subcategory. click Site Settings.rvt. select Topography. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. under Contour Line Display. Site-in progress. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. enter 1000. In the Object Styles dialog. Under Range Type. 2 On the Settings menu. select Dash dot. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. you create topographic subregions to define roads. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise.11 Click OK. and islands. The object style subcategory. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. you create subregions in order to define roads. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . and islands. parking areas. Working Contour. In this exercise. such as material. The next exercise requires a new training file. parking areas. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. In the next exercise. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory.

click Lines. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 2 On the Design Bar. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. and open Metric\m_Site. In the left pane of the Open dialog. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.rvt. click Subregion. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Training Files.

8 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. click Finish Sketch. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. select Site . under Identity Data. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and click to open the Materials dialog. click Properties. under Materials and Finishes. enter Parking for Name. 6 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK.NOTE In the Metric training file.Tarmacadam for Name. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

Tarmacadam. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each.9 On the View Control Bar. click Edit Boundary. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and double-click Topography Schedule. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. As you create new subregions. 14 On the Options Bar. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. they display within this schedule. double-click Site. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch.

20 On the View Control Bar. In this training project. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the project area has increased. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Within each subregion. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 18 In the Project Browser. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . under Floor Plans. click Subregion. double-click Site. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. under Schedules/Quantities. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Delete overlapping lines. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. 22 On the Design Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser.

23 In the upper-right parking area. click Properties. and click OK. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click Topography Schedule.Grass for Name. under Identity Data. select Site . and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . and click to open the Materials dialog. enter Island . click the value for Material. 29 On the View Control Bar. 30 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities.Grass for Name. 24 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. under Materials and Finishes.

You must sketch each region separately. under Floor Plans. 35 On the Design Bar. Name the subregion Walkway. click Subregion. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . under Schedules/Quantities.Grass. click Lines. double-click Topography Schedule. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.31 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.walkway. and apply the material Site . add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . 34 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Name each region Island Grass. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. double-click Site.

37 On the Design Bar. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. Notice that the schedule has been updated.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 38 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. there is still only one toposurface. under Schedules/Quantities.

Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. 2 Select the toposurface. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. double-click Site. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. under Floor Plans.rvt. When you use the grading tool. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . this project file is required in its current state. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.

Notice that the toposurface displays differently. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. see the tutorial. A warning dialog is displayed. click (Element Properties). Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Using Phasing on page 761. 6 On the Design Bar.3 On the Options Bar. select Existing for Phase Created. click Graded Region. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. select Copy Internal Points. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 8 Select the topographic surface. click Modify. under Phasing. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. and click Select and Edit. Grading the Toposurface | 699 .

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 10 Press DELETE. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .

Grading the Toposurface | 701 . and new.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. demolished. 11 On the View Control Bar.

16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 18 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Point. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 17 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.13 Press DELETE. 19 On the View Control Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 15 On the Options Bar. click Finish Surface. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm.

this project file is required in its current state. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. 24 On the View menu. only the original toposurface displays. click to view it at various angles. under Phasing. Therefore.20 On the View toolbar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can delete it. specify Existing for Phase. (SteeringWheels). Adding a Building Pad on page 703. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. and delete it. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. under Phasing. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. click View Properties. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Only the graded topography displays. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. specify New Construction for Phase. When you add a building pad. and click OK. you create a building pad. 23 Select the toposurface. click View Properties.

sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. click Finish Sketch. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . If you have an existing building model. the Pick Walls command is active. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Site tutorial-in progress. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE By default. click Pad. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.

9 On the View toolbar.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. this project file is required in its current state. 7 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Site Components on page 706. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . click (Default 3D View). click (SteeringWheels). Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Notice the new building pad.

click Modify. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . click Parking Component. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.rvt. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar.90 deg. double-click Site. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. Site tutorial-in progress. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the parking space. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Type Selector.Adding Site Components In this exercise.

Adding Site Components | 707 .NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 8 On the View toolbar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. click (Default 3D View). 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.

12 In the Type Selector. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . Notice the new parking spaces. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. choose any tree type. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels).9 On the View toolbar. click Site Component. under Floor Plans. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. double-click Site.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click (SteeringWheels). Adding Site Components | 709 . In the following illustration. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click (Default 3D View). Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 15 On the View toolbar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the View toolbar.

and click OK. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Hidden Line. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 710 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt. double-click Site. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. and click Apply. click Tag All Not Tagged. under Floor Plans.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. Site tutorial-in progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. this project file is required in its current state. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Apply.

as shown: 10 Using the same method. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. to position the shoulder of the leader. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. Click up and to the left. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. outside of the site. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. In the following exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . Click again to the left to position the leader. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected.

712 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Design Bar. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 12 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive.

Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. you create a parking schedule. 14 On the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space.■ Clear Leader. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Modify. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

and click OK. under Views (all). zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. click Schedule/Quantities. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. and click Add. click Close Hidden Windows. 12 In the Site plan. select Type. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . and under Heading. and click Add. select Parking for Category. under Floor Plans. The parking schedule is displayed. 5 Under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 Under Fields. 9 On the Window menu. 13 In the Parking Schedule. Site tutorial-in progress. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Space. 4 Under Available fields. enter Size. click the Fields tab. and under Heading. click Tile. 6 Click the Formatting tab. enter Space. 11 On the Window menu. double-click Site. 8 Under Fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select Mark. and click OK. select Type. 10 In the Project Browser. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. If necessary. number the first three spaces consecutively. select Mark.rvt.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 In the Parking Schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . the selected space highlights in the Site plan. finish numbering the remaining spaces.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Space.

716 .

Working in a shared project In a shared project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. they cannot make changes to it. you specify an active workset. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. stairs. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. select the desired workset. Using Worksharing. After the project is shared. called Worksharing. To make a workset editable. and so on. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. You can enable Worksharing for any project. you must first enable Worksharing. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. In this tutorial. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. use Element Borrowing. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. The first time you activate worksets within a project. however. go to the Worksets dialog. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. floors. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. When you are working on a shared project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you can select which worksets are open or closed. and click Editable. such as annotations and dimensions. Elements specific to a view. such as walls. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. A workset is a collection of building elements. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. doors. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. All other team members can view this workset.

Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. In the next exercise. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. In most projects. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. After learning the fundamentals. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly.dialog. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. When setting up Worksharing. Instead. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. and View worksets. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You should have at least one workset for each person. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. for a typical project. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. In a multi-story structure. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Experience has shown that. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . not including the Project Standards. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. such as a tenant interior. Shared Levels and Grids.

you control workset visibility on a per view basis. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. When you create a new workset. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. For example. Regardless of the default setting. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. As new members create worksets for their own use. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. with each assigned a specific functional task. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. if a workset named Interior was created. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. When creating the new worksets. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets.Team member roles Typically. On this tab. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . designers work in teams. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration.

Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. Therefore. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. When you save to the central file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. your changes are saved. After saving to the central file. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. When you save to the central file. proceeds as usual. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. the file is saved as the central file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. your changes propagate to the entire team. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. As you work. within the local file. However. When you save locally (to your local file). no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. This is called “Selective Open. This makes them available to other team members. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. however. On the Options Bar. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you should then save to your local file. you can select which workset is active. you make that workset editable by you. Generally. When finished or at regular intervals. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. they are not propagated to the rest of the team.

reload the latest changes from the central file. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. and then save the local file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. if you know who checked out the required workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. and make that workset editable. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. using VPN. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. for instance. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. In the next exercise. When working remotely. make any required worksets editable. In this situation. In this conceptual exercise. you should check out the Materials workset. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. To do this. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. In this instance. save to the central file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Alternatively.

you enable Worksharing within an existing project. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. under Show. In the left pane of the Open dialog." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise.rvt. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. The Worksets dialog displays. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. and notice all are editable by you. Your username displays as the present owner. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. and open Common\c_Worksets. click Training Files. 3 In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. When you enable worksharing. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open.

Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. You do. and double-click Level 1. click OK. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. expand Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Only User-Created worksets should display. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. In this simple training project. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. 13 In the Rename dialog. however. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. currently named Workset1. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 9 Click New. Project Standards. expand Views (all). 8 Click OK. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". a third team member is assigned furniture placement. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. In this training file. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. another is assigned the interior layout. you can rename the default workset.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 12 Click Rename. click . clear Families. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. a small number of team members are working on the building model. and Views. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. it is better to make them visible by default. In this case. select Workset1. click New. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . clear Visible by default in all views. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. Because the interior walls appear in many views. type the name Exterior Shell. 16 In the drawing area. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. under Identity Data. imagine four users including yourself. Therefore. For example. ■ 5 Under Show. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. When you initially activate Worksharing. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. and click OK. 14 In the Worksets dialog. For training purposes. Rather than create a new workset for these elements.

click the Worksets tab. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 26 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. and click OK. stairs. 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. including the interior doors. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. and walls. and click OK. under Identity Data. 29 Click OK. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click . click . 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset.19 Click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. under Identity Data. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 23 Select all of the interior elements.

This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 38 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 42 On the right side of the dialog. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. click Save As. In this exercise. click Worksets. and click OK. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 39 Click Save. 32 Select Interior Layout. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. make sure you remember the location of this central file. Now that you have created the central file. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. click Non Editable. select all of the interior elements of the building model. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. If any interior elements remain. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. double-click Level 2. click Close. under Floor Plans. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 41 In the Worksets dialog. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. select Interior Layout for Workset. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 43 Click OK. 33 In the Project Browser.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. under Identity Data. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . 34 In the drawing area. 44 On the File menu. under Views (all). click . 30 On the View menu. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click the Worksets tab. click Visibility/Graphics.

select all the User-Created worksets. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In this case. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Worksets. 4 Click Open. 6 On the File menu. you create your local file. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. 11 In the Worksets dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 13 On the Window menu. In addition. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. select Interior Layout for Name. select the central file. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. click Options. and click OK. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 15 In the Project Browser. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. please do so before continuing. If you have not yet completed the exercise. click Save As. Before working on the model.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 7 In the Save As dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Open. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. and select Specify. expand Views (all). 2 In the Open dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 12 Click OK. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and click OK. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and double-click Level 1. select Interior Layout. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. make modifications to the building model. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. Next. check out worksets. and select Yes for Editable. expand Floor Plans. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them.

18 On the Options Bar. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. In this case. Verify that it is cleared. click . and click OK. 23 On the File menu. 21 On the Options Bar. In the Worksets dialog. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. you can still edit this wall. under Identity Data. If it was owned by another user. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. click Modify. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. click . however. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 24 Click OK. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Under Constraints. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 22 Click OK.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If this is selected. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. On the Options Bar. Because this element is not owned by another user. click Worksets. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. notice the Editable Only option.

click Modify. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 29 In the Type Selector. The precise location is not important. click Door. 26 Delete the door. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Basic Wall: Interior . add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall.126mm Partition (2-hr). 31 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Type Selector.

it is recommended. save to central. Whenever you save. checked out worksets. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. two users access the central file through a network connection. If you have not yet completed these exercises. each user must check out worksets. By default. which matches the information in the Status Bar. and save locally immediately afterward. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you should relinquish all worksets. You modified the building model. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. For training purposes. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. In this particular case. make elements editable. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. click Save to Central. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. When working in your local file. At the end of a work session. In this exercise. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. a tooltip. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. you should perform regular saves. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. leave this file open in its current state. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Throughout the process. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. In addition. you created your local file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Borrowed Elements is selected. displays the workset as well as the element type. and reload the latest changes. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. please do so before continuing. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK.

15 On the File menu. 9 Click Open. under Username. and proceed to Creating a local copy.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. User 2: Create a local file. 12 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. select the central file. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . This is a system setting. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. You now have a local copy of the project. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. For training purposes. and click OK. 11 On the File menu. 3 On the Settings menu. skip the following section.rvt. and select Yes for Editable. specifically sequenced. and reset the Username to your computer login name. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and click Save. return to the Settings dialog. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and select Specify. enter User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Worksets. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. In addition. click Open. consider that person to be User 1. 7 In the Open dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. 4 Click the General Tab and. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. click Options. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. and click OK. one user has already created a local file. instructions are staggered. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. select all the User-Created worksets. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. This file is for your use only. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. In the following section of this exercise. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Save As. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise.

You are now the owner of that workset. it becomes the active workset. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1: Check out worksets. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and double-click Level 1. 17 Click OK. modify the building model. and select Yes for Editable. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. If it is not open. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. If you only have one workset checked out. 23 Click OK. select the lower exterior wall. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 19 On the File menu. 27 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. open it now. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 24 In the Project Browser. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. expand Views (all). Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.” 29 Click OK. click Worksets. click Save to Central. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and double-click Level 1. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. expand Floor Plans.

42 Select Furniture Layout. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 46 In the Project Browser.” 39 Click OK. click Save to Central. 41 On the File menu. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. Click Yes. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. under Floor Plans. click Worksets. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. under Floor Plans. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . right-click Level 1. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. However. select Yes for Editable. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 37 On the File menu. 44 In the Project Browser. 33 On the File menu. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. Before adding any furniture. click Reload Latest. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Views (all). you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. The changes User 2 made are apparent. under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Save to Central. 43 In the Project Browser. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. and click OK. When you save to central.” 35 Click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you should create a furniture plan view.

click Worksets. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Reload Latest. click Modify. click Component. and click OK. 66 On the File menu. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Rename. 63 In the Worksets dialog. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 60 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 48 In the Type Selector. and click Element Properties. and click inside any room. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. click the Worksets tab.200mm. under Show. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Edit/New. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. are placed under Project Standards. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. Therefore. click Visibility/Graphics. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 61 Click OK 2 times.” 55 Click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. enter Exterior Wall . 62 On the File menu. 65 Click OK. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. NOTE System families. 53 On the File menu. 49 On the Design Bar. click Save to Central. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. such as Wall Types. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Save to Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. rather than Families. choose any desk. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 50 On the View menu. select Project Standards.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser.

This exercise requires two users and. and these problems are rectified. As each of you work. 3 In the Save As dialog. Each user checked out worksets. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. and published their changes back to the central file. select the following. leave this file open in its current state. finished the previous workset exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Save As. and still have your local files open. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. throughout this training. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. select Reload Latest. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. In subsequent steps. you need to set up your central and local files. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . leave this file open in its current state. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and click OK. click Options. There are specific instructions for each user. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. click Training Files. Each user must have network access to the central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. In the final exercise of this tutorial. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. you save the training file as a central file. 70 On the File menu. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. At the appropriate point in this exercise.rvt. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Checking out worksets. and save 69 On the File menu. User 1: Reload latest. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. select Save to Central. modified the building model. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC).

and click Save. and click OK. 18 In the Save As dialog. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and click Save. and click OK. 6 On the File menu. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. On the Settings menu. click Save As. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 5 Click Save. This is the local file for User 1. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Set the Username to User 2. and select Specify. click Options. click Options. and click OK. In addition. 13 In the Open dialog. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. This is a system setting. 12 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 8 In the Save As dialog. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 17 On the File menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. select Make this a Central File after save. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. Next. return to the Settings dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Options. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. select the central file.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 15 Click Open. and click OK. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Save As. click Open. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. The central file should still be open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and click OK. 19 In the File Save Options dialog.

and then click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. select the second window from the top. and then click OK. 22 In the Worksets dialog. double-click Level 1. You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. select the Interior Layout workset. select Interior Layout. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. select Exterior Shell. 27 Under Active Workset. At this point.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. and click Editing Requests. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and click Open. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. After you submit the request. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 26 In the Worksets dialog. select them. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. Afterwards. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and select Yes for Editable. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 24 Under Active Workset. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 30 On the left exterior wall. 29 On the Options Bar. and select Yes for Editable. click the File menu. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. click Worksets. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. under Floor Plans. verify that Editable Only is cleared. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence.

38 Click OK. select the following. click Check Now. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 36 Click Close. and notice the window is in the new location. select the request submitted by User 2. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. In this multi-user exercise. and the other user granted it. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . select Save to Central. you requested permission to edit the element. click Close. In this case. and close 39 On the File menu. A message informs you that your request has been granted. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. to Local.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and click OK. 35 Click Grant.

738 .

it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. 739 . At any time in the design process. In this particular case. In this tutorial. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. After you and the client agree on the final design. In addition. The client has asked you to create various options. you can have multiple sets of design options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. Using design options. For example.

each is constructed for interchangeability. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). In the final exercise of this lesson. under Option Set. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. With the second option. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. make your final design decision. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Edit Selected. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams.rvt. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you design each of the structural options. In the second exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. the roof and structure systems must work together. the only available command is to create a new option set. After you create a design option.In the first exercise in this lesson. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. 2 In the Design Options dialog. you can edit it. you set up multiple design option sets. therefore. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. TIP In this exercise. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and click Close. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. click Training Files. click New. and delete the unwanted options from the project. each with multiple design options.

The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. In the following illustration. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 7 In the Type Selector. or add a dimension string between the columns. expand Floor Plans. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to.4 In the Project Browser. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 11 On the Edit toolbar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . click Modify. By selecting Multiple. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. click 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. In this case. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. TIP To center the middle column. select: ■ ■ ■ . the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and the third column centered between the two. expand Views (all). click Column. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. add three columns. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it.

Because of the size of the columns. 17 Zoom out and. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. using the same technique. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . they are difficult to see in this view. When you are finished.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 18 On the View toolbar. click . click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.

Zoom in on the upper right column. double-click TOP OF CORE. 21 In the Type Selector. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Use the following illustration as a guide. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. you add the beams that span the columns. The second click specifies the end of the beam. In it. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. click Beam. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 19 In the Project Browser. You can do this manually or use the Copy command.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . Next. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. The first click specifies the beam start point. click Modify. select Round Bar : 50mm.

744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . move down to the next set of columns. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 30 On the View toolbar. and select the center of the column to add a copy.25 On the Edit toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 28 Zoom out. click . and click the center point. select: ■ ■ ■ . click 26 On the Options Bar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. zoom into the left column.

under Option Set. click New. click Rename. under Option. 43 In the Rename dialog. under Option. under Option. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). and click OK. enter Brackets for New. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. enter Structure for New. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. There should now be two roofing design options. click Rename. 33 Click Finish Editing. click New. 46 Under Option. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 45 Under Roofing. and click OK. under Option Set.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 40 In the Rename dialog. enter Roofing for New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. enter Beam for New. select Option 1 (primary). 38 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. click Rename. click New. 41 Under Option Set. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. under Option. not a new option set. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. and click OK. name the option Louvers. 36 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 37 Select Option 2 and.

and click OK. Under Now Editing.47 Under Roofing. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 50 In the Design Options dialog. under Structure. 52 Click Close. When finished. double-click ROOF TERRACE. it will resemble the following illustration. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. you create the second design option. click Rename. select Beam. 53 In the Project Browser. name the option Sunscreen. select Edit Selected. select Option 2. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 51 Under Edit. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 48 Under Option. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. under Floor Plans. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed.

Using the Align tool requires two clicks.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Roof Beam. Refer to the following illustration. click Component. click Align. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . The second click represents the plane that is moved. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 58 On the Tools menu. 56 In the Type Selector. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.

click Modify.60 After aligning the beam. 62 Select the beam and. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. on the Edit toolbar. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click to indicate the end point of the move. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The first click sets the move start point.

name the file. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 69 Click Close. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . That is because the brackets option is set to primary. click Finish Editing. m_Urban_House-in progress. click Save As. which is visible by default.rvt. 68 In the Design Options dialog. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 70 On the File menu.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 66 On the View toolbar. 67 On the Tools menu. click . Notice that even before you close the dialog. you need this file in its current state. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save.

you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. If you need to add dimensions. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 5 Click Close.In this exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The first option. delete them after the rafter is in place. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 3 In the Design Options dialog. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial.rvt. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Under Now Editing. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you design each of the roofing options. expand Views (all). The dimensions shown are for training purposes. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 10 Referring to the following illustration. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. each with multiple design options to pick from. you set up multiple design option sets. Sunscreen. In the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. The second roofing system. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . a Louver system. under Roofing. With the second option. do so now. 2 On the Tools menu. the other for beams. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. click Component. 8 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Project Browser. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. select Louvers (primary). open it now. 4 Under Edit. click Edit Selected.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click Array. Select 2nd for Move To. under Other. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. Enter 5 for Number. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click . 15 On the Edit menu. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 .11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. enter 11750 mm for Length. 16 On the Options Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. Select Constrain. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. and click OK.

Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. and press ENTER. when the listening dimension displays. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990.

22 On the Design Bar. and click Array. 26 On the Options Bar. under Other. click Component. and select the louver you just placed. 25 With the louver still selected. and click OK. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Select 2nd for Move To. click the Edit menu. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 27 For the array starting point. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 .Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select Constrain. click Modify. Enter 34 for Number. 20 In the Type Selector. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. enter 5475 mm for Length. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration.

28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 29 On the View toolbar. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . when the listening dimension displays. and press Enter. enter 300. click . and. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart.

The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. under Roofing. 30 On the Tools menu. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Therefore. click Finish Editing. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . under Edit. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Lines. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 33 Under Editing. Click OK. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click West. 34 In the Project Browser. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Edit Selected. and then click Close. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. In this case. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 39 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 40 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations.The louver roof system is complete. click . Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. select Sunscreen.

46 On the Tools menu. 49 On the View toolbar. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. The first two points define the ends of the line. 45 Click OK. 43 On the Design Bar. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. the top of the next column on the right. Under Constraints. 48 On the Design Bar. Select the right arc. click Trim/Extend.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. then the center arc. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. and the third point defines the arc. 41 Select the top of the left column. click Finish Sketch. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. then you can modify it through the dimension. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. click Properties. The arcs should connect. Under Constraints. click . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. You will fix this in a later step. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End.

you select a design. After exploring the combinations. a Louver system. do so now. you need this file in its current state. make it part of the building model. under Edit. In this exercise. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. enter Primary Option. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. and then click Close. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. and click Rename. secondary. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. The second roofing system. 50 On the Tools menu. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. and delete the discarded design options. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you designed each of the roofing options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Managing Design Options | 757 . 4 In the Project Browser. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 52 On the File menu. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. under Views (all). Managing Design Options In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. The first option. and click OK. click Save. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. under Views (all). right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Sunscreen. tertiary. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 51 In the Design Options dialog. expand 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}.The louver roof system is complete. click Finish Editing. and last options.

double-click Secondary Option. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. double-click Primary Option. under Views (all). Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 11 On the View menu. 10 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Rename. under 3D Views. and click OK.5 Right-click each of the copies. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. under Views (all). 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

Managing Design Options | 759 . and click OK. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 15 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under 3D Views. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. At this point.14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Last Option. In this case. and click OK. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 On the View menu. double-click Tertiary Option. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). In your design options. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

Because the client has selected the design option. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 25 Select Structure. and deleted the discarded design options. the current primaries are no longer options. click Delete. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Accept Primary. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 35 On the File menu. 33 In the Design Options dialog. In this exercise. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. 30 Under Option Set. 29 Select Roofing. you selected a design. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 26 Under Option Set. double-click Primary Option.22 On the Tools menu. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. the beam option becomes part of the model. The set is deleted. select Beam. click Yes. click Save. 27 In the alert dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . This was the client choice for structural. 24 Under Option. click Close. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 23 In the Design Options dialog. An alert is displayed. After exploring the combinations. select Make Primary. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. made it part of the building model. under Structure. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. click Yes.

You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. This changes room definition and total building model area.Project Phasing 22 In any project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. 761 . You create new phases. and then add new building model elements. You create new phases. In the second exercise. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. In the second exercise. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. demolish existing construction. then add new walls and doors in a different location. For the client. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. complete with schedules. demolish existing walls and doors. In the lesson and exercises that follow.

762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. 4 Click Cancel. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. This means that all building model elements. click Modify. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. When you create a new project. and double-click Level 1. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Phasing. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. go to the Settings menu. 7 Click Cancel. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. regardless of phase. and click OK. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. are visible in this view. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. As you add new elements to the building model. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. 6 On the Options Bar. and open Common\c_Phasing. click Project Units. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. expand Views (all). 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. During the demolition and renovation process. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. If you wish to do so. In the Element Properties dialog. define the units. click (Element Properties). you do not need to change the project units to metric. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. under Phasing.rvt. click Training Files.

it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. all of the building model elements. are highlighted in red. enter Level 1 . Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties.Existing. 14 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1 . select Existing. enter Level 1 . Because this is a renovation project. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP If this were a multi-story building. including the door tags. and click Rename. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Filter dialog.Existing. and click OK. click . After you release the mouse button. After you create the views. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. clear Door Tags. and click OK. right-click Level 1 . under Floor Plans. for Phase Created. click Modify. 16 In the Rename dialog. 20 In the Rename dialog.Existing. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. under Floor Plans.Demo. under Phasing. 17 Click No. Phasing Your Model | 763 . you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. 10 On the Options Bar. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. click (Filter Selection). Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click Level 1. Because this is a phase-specific view. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 24 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line pattern is still gray.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. to which all the building model elements belong. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. 28 Under Filter Name. under Floor Plans. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . under New. 26 In the Phasing dialog. for Phase. Existing. and click OK. Demolished. double-click Level 1 . Later in this exercise. new construction occurs after existing construction. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Phase status is time-dependent. Because of this time relationship. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black.Existing. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 29 For Composite Plan. under Floor Plans. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Existing. There are five default phase filters. On a logical time line. select Overridden. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. You may need to zoom in to see this. enter Composite Plan. In this case.Demo. under Phasing. Next. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. however. 27 Click New. and Temporary. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. you modify these settings. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click the Phase Filters tab.

You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 42 In the Project Browser. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. Phasing Your Model | 765 . 36 Using the same method. you demolish all elements hosted by it. select a lighter blue.31 Under Phase Status. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. select the line style. There are two ways to demolish an element. under Floor Plans. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. click OK. 32 In the Demolished row. click the value for Color. select Demolished. you begin demolition. under Cut ➤ Lines. double-click Level 1 . Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. its display changes to a red dashed line. 34 In the Color dialog. select the interior walls one at a time. click (Demolish).Existing. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. As you click each wall. under Floor Plans. or you can use the demolish tool. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 39 In the Phasing dialog. When you demolish the host. select red. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. Next. 35 Click OK twice. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser.Demo. double-click Level 1 . That is because doors are wall-hosted elements.

54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. and click OK. 53 Open Level 1 . 49 On the Design Bar. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. add a long horizontal wall. for Phase Filter. 50 In the Type Selector.Existing. select Basic Wall: Interior . and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Demo. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". The demolished walls no longer display. select Show Previous + New.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 55 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 52 Open Level 1 . Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. for Phase Filter. 47 In the Type Selector. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Wall. click Door.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. right-click Level 1 . 60 On the View toolbar. Phasing Your Model | 767 .Demo. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. which are displayed as red. and existing shows as half-tone. new is shown in blue. The renovated building model plan is displayed.New. 61 On the View Control Bar. 62 If necessary. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 59 Open Level 1 . click (Default 3D View). because the phase filter is set to Show All. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. 57 In the Project Browser. regardless of phase. All elements are displayed in this view.New.

you can do so at this time. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. demolition. In this exercise. In this view. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. click Training Files. therefore.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. In this view. and new construction. If you wish to save this file. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you do not need to change the project units to metric. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style.rvt. click Project Units. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. sizes. 63 Close the file. the rooms change in both definition and size. You can also see that the room quantities. As the renovation process continues.New. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you wish to do so. expand Views (all). Notice that this view is the original building model. All room boundaries are phase-specific. go to the Settings menu.Demo. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions.Existing. and double-click Level 1 . 3 Open Level 1 . 2 Open Level 1 . and locations change depending on the phase of the project. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. you can see the new walls added to the building model. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In the next exercise. define the units. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.

12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 10 Open Level 1 .Demo. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room. click Modify. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. and maximize the view. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 11 On the Design Bar. In the Phasing dialog.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. yet they have different room numbers. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Room. 13 Open Level 1 . click Room Tag.New. click in each room as you move to the right. 5 Click OK. 6 Open Level 1 .Existing. Use the following illustration as a guide.

add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 20 Close the file. 16 In the Project Browser. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.New Construction. In this exercise. 18 Open Room Schedule . click Tile. In this case. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase.Existing. In addition. expand Schedules/Quantities. 17 On the Window menu. and double-click Room Schedule . View phase-specific room schedules. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 19 On the Window menu. click Close Hidden Windows. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. The two schedule views tile.

Comparison of alternatives on a site. In these situations. 771 . you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. In this tutorial. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. You position the building models on the site plan. performance.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. In the final lesson. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. modify their visibility. This maximizes efficiency. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. and manage the links throughout the project.

NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. modify their visibility. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You position the building models on the site. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. and the other is a townhouse.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . One building model is a condominium. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You link two building models to the project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.

NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. and click OK. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. Select c_Site. this system is not exposed to the user. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 2 On the File menu. click Training Files. All three files now reside. ■ ■ Manual . and open Common\c_Site. 4 On the File menu. Auto . however. this option will place the link at a predefined location. with write permission. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 .Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. and click Properties. select the three files. click Open. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.rvt. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. c_Townhouse. RELATED See the lesson.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. 8 Clear Read-only. 5 On the File menu. click Save As. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and save the file there. you can do so. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. click Close. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual .Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Otherwise. Click Open. This option is grayed out. click Open. Manual . in the Model Linking folder that you created. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click. c_Condo_Complex.■ Auto . you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.

Notice the blue detail lines. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. 13 Click Open. expand Floor Plans. For Positioning. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units.Origin to Origin. and make your changes. 10 In the Project Browser. you can go to the Settings menu.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so. expand Views (all). select Auto . 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Project Units. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and double-click Level 1. 11 On the File menu. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.

click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. After you select it. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.rvt displays in the Type Selector. 15 On the Edit toolbar. The second click specifies the move endpoint. The first click specifies the move start point. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The Move command requires two clicks. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. 17 For the move endpoint. The linked model moves as one object.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 16 For the move start point. click (Move).

For Positioning. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines.Origin to Origin. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 21 Click Open. and select c_Townhouse. 18 On the View menu. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Auto . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.After you specify the location to move to.

The townhouse building model displays above the site model. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. and click to specify the end of the rotation. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. click (Rotate). 23 On the Edit toolbar. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. In this case. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. you first specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . click to specify the rotation start point. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and.

Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click (Move). 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.

The first click specifies the start point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. 30 For the starting point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 .The townhouse is located within its required footprint. click (Copy).

use the Move command to make any adjustments. 37 On the View toolbar. for Name. click (Default 3D View). enter Townhouse A. under Identity data. 32 On the Edit menu. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. click Rotate. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. and click OK. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. click . 34 On the Options Bar. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse.

they were placed too low within the site topography. 2 On the SteeringWheels. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . After linking the files. In the next exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you need this project file open and in this view. do so before continuing. When you originally linked the files. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. click and hold Orbit. In this exercise. click Save. click (SteeringWheels). In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel.38 On the File menu.

the status bar displays the name of the linked file. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. and click to select the line. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. and then select the plane that you want to align. In this case. To do this. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. under Views (all).Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project.rvt. click (Align). 3 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. When using the Align command. when it highlights. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. you first select the plane you want to align to. Click the Revit Links tab. In the steps that follow. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. 7 On the Tools toolbar. expand Elevations. and double-click South. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. and click OK.

11 Return to the South elevation view. double-click North. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . (SteeringWheels). under Elevations. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 12 On the View toolbar. 15 On the File menu. click Save. click 13 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View).Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. 9 In the Project Browser. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. This would over-constrain the model. click and hold Orbit. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 14 On the SteeringWheels.

By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. display settings. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. under Elevations. 2 On the View menu. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . When you link a file. click the Revit Links tab. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. If you have not completed the previous exercise.rvt. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. do so before continuing. detail level. you need this project file open and in this view. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. 10 Click OK. double-click South. In this exercise. or Custom. By linked view. click OK. expand c_Townhouse. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Visibility. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. the defaults are set to By host view for all options.rvt. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 For Annotation Categories. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. In the next exercise. 9 Under Visibility. you can independently control the visibility settings. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select <Custom>. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. As you can see. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. click Visibility/Graphics. scroll down and clear Levels. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. If the Basics page is set to Custom. click By Host View. and the halftone settings for each linked project. click Custom.

Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. double-click Level 1. Using the Custom option. no detail level changes are required. click By Host View. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You can click the value for Detail Level. 23 In the Model categories list. 24 Click OK. and then set the detail level to coarse. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. and click OK. or fine. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . With linked files. under Display Settings. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. 16 Under Visibility. click the Revit Links tab. click Visibility/Graphics. select Custom. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. By selecting custom under Model Categories. select <Custom>. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. expand c_Townhouse. 20 For c_Townhouse. 14 On the View menu. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser.rvt. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. on the Basics tab. under Floor Plans. In this case. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. By default. click the Revit Links tab. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. medium. 22 Click the Model Categories tab.

with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. click OK. you need this project file open and in this view. 26 Under Display Settings. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. phase. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. under Visibility. existing. click Custom for the Townhouse link. In this exercise. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. you manage the linked files. on a sloped site for instance. 29 Click OK. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. By default. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. With the Show All filter applied. all new. 28 Select By linked view for View range. In most cases. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In the next exercise.rvt. In this case. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . All other components are grayed out. and phase filter of a specific link. select c_Townhouse. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In this case. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. 25 On the Revit Links tab. demolished. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 31 On the File menu. this is preferable. there are situations. click Save. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. However. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. do so before continuing. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. As links are moved to new locations in the host project.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. the link is maintained. click Yes. 3 Under Path Type. The default path type is Relative. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. You learn more about this in the next lesson. In general. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. 5 Click Unload. click Manage Links. Locations Not Saved. 7 Click OK. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. click the Revit tab. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. In a shared coordinate environment.rvt. If you have not completed the previous exercise. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. Notice the Loaded. 6 At the confirmation prompt. 4 Under Linked File. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. select c_Condo_Complex. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.

Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. expand Revit Links. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. If you choose not to open that workset. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. In these cases. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .rvt. right-click c_Condo_Complex. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. However. When you initially place the link. click the arrow next to the Open button. click Save As. and click Reload. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. 8 In the Project Browser. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. and select Specify. In general. 9 On the File menu. the link is not loaded. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models.10 In the Save As dialog. If you have not completed the previous lesson. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When you share coordinates between projects. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In this exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. and the resulting project files. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. leave the project file open in its current view. and save it as an RVT file. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. When used in conjunction with model linking. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . In essence. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). The host file consists primarily of site components. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. do so before continuing. name the file Site_Project. In the next lesson. you are establishing a shared origin point.

open it before continuing. Linking Building Models on page 772. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. click Open. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. If you have not completed the lesson. and the resulting project files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. do so before continuing. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. If you have closed the project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select Site_Project. click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. In this case.coordinates are used. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. 3 In the drawing area. 2 On the Tools menu. When you are working in the host project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. As indicated in the Status Bar. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file.rvt and click Open. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt.

select Location 1. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click OK. If you have not completed the exercise. click to select it. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. In this exercise. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. even though both models originate from one linked file. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. Lot B. do so before continuing. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. but can have multiple additional locations. when the edges highlight. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . However. it is placed at a specific location. On the Status Bar. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. 5 On the Design Bar. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. These three locations can be named Lot A. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. this location is not saved outside of the host project. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. and Lot C. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site.

click Reconcile. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. 12 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This is a one-time operation. under Instance Parameters. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project.2 On the Options Bar. When constraining a link to a location. select Move instance to. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. click . and click OK. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 4 Under Value. . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. under Instance Parameters. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 7 In the Rename dialog. 9 In the Select Location dialog. click Rename. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. In the Choose Location dialog. enter Lot A for New. Record the current position as a location. and click OK. click OK. click Change. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

although it may appear that the linked files are moving. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 26 Click OK. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. This is a two-click process. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. The first click specifies the move start point. 16 Click Change. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. a warning displays. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. select the second option. or cancel the action. you cannot redefine its location. Because Lot A is currently in use. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click OK. and click OK. click Manage Links. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 23 Click Save Locations. the active location position is moved. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click OK. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. click Duplicate. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. ignore the warning. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 19 In the Select Location dialog. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 30 On the Tools menu. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. Record current position as. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. By relocating a project.Notice the OK button is not active. and the left townhouse resides at that location. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and then select the townhouse project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . The second click specifies the move endpoint. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. To explicitly save a location. When you release the mouse button. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. Notice the OK button is still not active. select Save. enter Lot B for Name. make sure Lot B is selected. click the Revit tab. When you create a location. When you relocate a project.

In this exercise. NOTE In the following exercise. 34 On the File menu. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. and click OK. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. click Save. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 36 On the File menu. click Close. select Save. 33 On the Edit menu. you work in one of the linked projects.

it is placed automatically within the host project.rvt file. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. When opening the linked file. click Open. do so before continuing. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. select Auto . 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. If you have not completed the exercises. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. 2 On the File menu. double-click 1st Floor. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. In addition. Click Open. Because this building model only has one named location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. For Positioning.rvt file. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location.By Shared Coordinates. under Floor Plans. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. The current active location is Lot A. if other models were linked into the same host. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 .

Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. you can select Lot C if necessary. In the host file. click Manage Place and Locations. you create a new location. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In the next exercise. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. click Duplicate. orient a view to true north. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. click Manage Place and Locations. and click OK. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you need this project file open and in this view. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. 7 Click OK. In this exercise. enter Lot C. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. select True North for Orientation. 6 Select Lot B. and click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Make Current. If you have not completed the exercises. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. In this exercise. you manage the shared locations. do so before continuing. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. click View Properties. 3 In the Name dialog. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. under Graphics.

If you have not completed the exercise. On the Options Bar.rvt and click Open.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. do so before continuing. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. You can save the file if you wish. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Select Site_Project. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. click Open. click Close. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. In this exercise. 10 On the File menu.

5 Under Available fields. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. and click OK. select Doors. click the Fields tab. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. click Schedule/Quantities.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Count. and click Add.

and click Properties. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. expand Schedules/Quantities. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.8 Click OK. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. 13 On the File menu. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. You have completed this tutorial. 12 Select Grand totals. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Door Schedule. 14 On the File menu. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. click Close. under Other. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . clear Itemize every instance. select Family and Type for Sort by. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. click Save. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise. and then click OK twice. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

In the first lesson. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click the value for Selection color. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. click Training Files. notification preferences. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. In the second lesson. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment.rte. Notice that the drawing area is black. click the Graphics tab. 3 In the Options dialog. select Invert background color. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. These settings control the graphics. 10 In the Options dialog. 6 In the New Project dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 803 . and click OK. under Template file. and your username when using worksets. you create an office template. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. and set it as your default template. you modify the system environment. 8 In the New Project dialog. journal cleanup options. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click Browse.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 4 Under Colors. they are not saved to project files or template files. which is independent of the project settings. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. selection default options. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click the Graphics tab. 11 Under Colors. Finally. click OK.

and open Metric\m_Settings. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. and select the wall. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. select None. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Click OK. When an error occurs. 22 When prompted to save changes. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors.12 In the Color dialog. However. For Tooltip assistance. click Modify. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. and click OK. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. click the Graphics tab. the elements causing the error display using this color. select yellow. 18 On the Design Bar. clear Invert background color. 26 In the Options dialog. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 13 Click the General tab. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click Training Files. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. select red. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall. For Selection color. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select One hour. 14 Under Notifications. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click No.

7 In the Options dialog. and family libraries. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. click the File Locations tab. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. you can start a new project with that template. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). click Browse. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 3 Under Default template file. 5 Under Default path for user files. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. including your default project template. notice the list of library names. TIP To view a template. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. 4 Click Cancel. and click Browse to select a template. select the folder to save your files to by default. Your login name displays by default. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. centralized. click Places. Specifying File Locations on page 805. select Normal. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 8 Click Cancel. Under Journal File Cleanup.27 Click the General tab. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. family template files. and click Open. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 2 In the Options dialog. This path is set automatically during the installation process. click Browse. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. If prompted. These files are used in the software support process. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. such as in a large. do not save the changes. For Tooltip assistance. 10 In the Places dialog. click Browse. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. select your preferred Save reminder interval. Under Username. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. under Default path for family template files. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . you specify default file locations.

under Libraries. and you can create new libraries. or loading a Revit Architecture file. click (Add Value). templates. and click Open.library names and path. Load. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and Import dialogs. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Save. When you are opening. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and change the name to My Library. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. saving. In the following illustration. and click the icon side of the field. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . or families. and select it as the library path. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. 11 In the Places dialog.

Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click the My Library icon. This path is determined during installation. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and Import dialogs. click Edit. 3 Under Settings. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 5 In the text editor. 15 Under Library Name. 19 Click Cancel. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. such as bump maps. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 2 In the Options dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Load. click Edit. Save. and click OK twice. If you want to relocate this path. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 22 Click Places. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. specify the new location here. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click the Spelling tab. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 28 Click OK. 9 In the text editor. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. custom color files. click My Library. 23 Select My Library. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. view the current path. 24 Click 25 Click OK.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and decal image files. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.

and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click OK. click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. 18 In the Options dialog. 22 In the text editor. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. delete sheetmtl-CU. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. work with snapping turned off. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rte. under Template file. 19 Under Settings. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. As you zoom in and out within a view. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 20 Under Personal dictionary. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Standard toolbar. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click OK. click Training Files. 14 Click in the drawing area. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. If prompted. click OK. click the Spelling tab. You can turn snap settings on and off. In this exercise. click Text.11 In the Options dialog. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. click Browse. 23 In the Options dialog. click Modify. click Restore Defaults. click default template. do not save the changes. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you modify snap increments. 4 In the New Project dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify snap settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 21 In the text editor. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. If it does not. 7 Under Object Snaps. While sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If you do not have a wheel button. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 10 On the Options Bar. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom out until it does so.. click OK. clear Chain. and move the cursor to the right. 8 In the Snaps dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. TIP To zoom while sketching. For example. enter SM. such as ZO to zoom out. and enter 500 . you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. click Wall.6 Under Dimension Snaps.

and delete the value 500 . 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and do not save the file.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. This is the increment that you added previously. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. If you move the cursor along the wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and move the cursor to the right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. click Modify. and specify the wall endpoint. and click Wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 18 Enter SM. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Notice that snapping is once again active. 24 Click OK. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and the wall edges. the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 21 Move the cursor downward. it will snap to the endpoints. Do not set the wall end point. Make sure you also delete the semicolon.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. lines. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . and open Metric\m_Settings. save the project file with a unique name. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. annotations. Using these options.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. and object styles. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. In the steps that follow. Finally. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. You create and modify materials. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. and use it to complete the remaining exercises.rvt. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. you render a region to observe the changes. fill patterns. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you apply a material to an element. click Training Files. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials.

3 Click (Duplicate). you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. enter Masonry . The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. select Stone. and texture of the material. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. When you change properties of a render appearance. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. and click (Element Properties). read-only library for render appearances. and select Masonry . the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project.Fieldstone material. 6 Click Replace. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. In the steps that follow. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. 10 Click the Graphics tab.Stone. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. 11 Click OK.Fieldstone. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 8 Select Riverstone Blue. Masonry . and click OK.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. When a model element is loaded into a project. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser.Fieldstone. The Render Appearance Library is a local. 9 Click Apply. The properties describe the color. However. and click OK. this material provides a starting point for the new material. In the next exercise. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. scale. In the Materials dialog. for Class. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. These details will display in rendered images. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. and double-click 02 Entry Level.

14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.Brick. 21 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click (Default 3D View). 25 On the View toolbar. 18 For Finish 1. 22 Select the left exterior wall. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 26 On the View Control Bar. select the rear exterior wall. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. . 19 On the right side of the Material field. click Model Graphics Style. Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone. 24 In the Type Selector. 20 In the Materials dialog. 17 For Structure. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 23 While pressing CTRL. click This is the material that you created. 15 Click Duplicate. select Masonry . the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . click Edit. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . 16 Enter the new wall name. click in the Material field.Fieldstone. and click OK.

you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. for Setting. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. select the render region (a red rectangle).Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 29 In the 3D view. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 32 In the Rendering dialog. under Quality. In the following exercise. and click Rendering. click Rendering Dialog. select Region. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. When finished. select Low or Medium. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. The rendering process begins. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. 31 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. right-click the Design Bar. 28 In the Rendering dialog.

36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 5 Click New. in the Rendering dialog. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. 3 Under Pattern Type. 7 Under Custom. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. click Show the model. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Zoom into the model. Drafting pattern density is fixed.rvt. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 33 In the Rendering dialog. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . click Import. choose Model. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. select Custom. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. expand Elevations. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. click Show the model. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. and clear Region.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. and double-click West. such as steel. Then click Render again. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

11 Click OK. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog.pat. and for Import scale. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 18 Under Surface Pattern. click Edit.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click Training Files.Fieldstone material. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. and click OK. for Finish 1. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. click Modify. 22 Click OK three times. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. 21 In the Materials dialog. 10 For Name. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click OK. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click in the Material field. 9 Under Custom. select Model. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit/New. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. enter Fieldstone. In the Materials dialog. under Pattern Type.56. click to select a fill pattern. enter .Fieldstone. select fldstn. click . Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. (Element Properties). click 15 For Structure.

Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. click (Default 3D View). 2 On the keyboard. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . m_Settings-in progress. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. and double-click 3 Windows.rvt. For example. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). adjust your zoom settings as needed. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP If the pattern does not display. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. there are often multiple window types within a project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.25 On the View toolbar.

9 Click OK twice.3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category (located under the materials list). click in the Value column. for Trim Exterior Material. for Trim Exterior Material. . click Edit/New. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). and click 15 Click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify. click (Element Properties). 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 8 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Materials dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Select the arched window. click in the Value column. click By Category. under Materials and Finishes. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 11 On the Options Bar. and click . 7 In the Type Properties dialog.

19 For Trim. for Class. When you render a 3D view. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. select Use Render Appearance for Shading.red paint. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . click OK. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. 25 In the search field.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. for Name. expand Windows. and select Trim. click OK. enter Trim . 28 Under Shading. select Trim. click in the Material column. type red. 23 Click Replace. select Paint. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. or keywords include the word red. 29 In the Materials dialog. . and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 18 On the Model Objects tab. and click OK. (Duplicate). The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. descriptions.

33 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Settings-in progress. m_Settings-in progress. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. 7 On the View Control Bar. enter Roof Line. Now that you have created a line pattern. 11 For Line Pattern. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. 10 For Line Color. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. under Category. select Roofs. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. select Red. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. for Name.rvt.31 On the View toolbar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. is open with the 3D view active. select Roof Line. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click New. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. (Default 3D view). 3 In the Line Patterns dialog.

but not the line pattern.12 Click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click to Building. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . Notice that the line color displays in this view. 13 In the Project Browser. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style.

click Override. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. elevations.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. for Visibility. double-click 03 Roof. 22 On the Model Categories tab. For Color. select Roof Line. For Pattern. under Floor Plans. select 5. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 15 In the Project Browser. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. Plans. 18 For Line Color. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Roofs. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select Solid. 19 For Line Pattern. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Blue. select Roofs. select Black. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 20 Click OK. under Category. sections.

33 In the Type Selector. This places the line above the topography. double-click Site. click New. select 2. select Red. (Line). 31 Click OK. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 29 For Name. select Level: 02 Entry Level. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. enter Zoning Setback. For Line Color. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ For Plane. and click OK. 34 On the Options Bar. select Zoning Setback. under Modify Subcategories. Click Click (Draw). specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. under Floor Plans. select Double dash. For Line Pattern. click Lines. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . Notice the site topography and the property lines.25 Click OK twice.

double-click 02 Entry Level. 38 On the Model Categories tab. 43 Click OK. and clear Zoning Setback. expand Lines. 36 On the View toolbar. Expand Site. (Default 3D View). 39 Click OK. and clear Property Lines. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. Modifying Annotations on page 825. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. under Floor Plans. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 44 On the View toolbar. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. and clear Zoning Setback. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 40 In the Project Browser. NOTE If Site is not selected. and then clear Property Lines. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. select it. click (Default 3D View).

Modifying Annotations | 825 . under Floor Plans. You have created a new dimension style. 7 Click OK twice. 5 Under Text. m_Settings-in progress. select Feet and fractional inches. for Units Format. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. double-click 02 Entry Level. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 4 Enter the name Linear .rvt. select Linear . click Modify. To place a dimension. 9 In the Type Selector. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings.Imperial and click OK. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click another wall. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click the default value. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. (Undo). Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click one wall. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. click Dimension. 10 On the Standard toolbar. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. and then click outside the second wall. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress. For Units. click Duplicate. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. and place a dimension on the floor plan.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall.Imperial. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt.

19 Click Load.14 On the Options Bar. click M_Window Tag . 18 In the Tags dialog.rfa. notice that the label displays 1i.Number as the assigned tag.Number. click (Element Properties). 21 In the Tags dialog. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click the bottom window. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 22 Under Loaded Tags.Number.Number is now the assigned tag. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . scroll down to Windows. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Then press Delete. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 24 While pressing CTRL. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. 26 On the Options Bar. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select the 3 window tags. under Category. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Leader. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Tag All Not Tagged. In the steps that follow. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 16 Click Cancel. 28 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. Leave M_Window Tag . In the preview image. 27 On the west wall. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 23 Click OK.

32 On the View toolbar. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the default value. dimensions use these project settings. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and click OK. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. the other displays the instance value. Specifying Units of Measurement. notice Window Tags appears twice. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. select To the nearest 100. 31 On the Design Bar. In the first section. 30 Under Leader. m_Settings-in progress. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps.rvt.Under Category. for Rounding. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view.Temporary Dimensions. verify that Create is clear. In the final section. select 0 decimal places. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. select Openings. and Detail Level Options on page 827. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values.Temporary Dimensions. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Unless overridden. you specify the project units of measurements. 2 In the Project Units dialog. 8 Under Walls. 9 Under Doors and Windows. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 4 In the Project Units dialog. M_Window Tag . select Faces. and click OK. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK. 3 In the Format dialog.Number. In the second section. for Area. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. click the default value. and Detail Level Options | 827 . (Default 3D View). Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 6 Click OK. For Unit symbol. for Length. select meters squared. you modify the detail level assignments. Unless overridden. dimension values display using this setting.

Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.In this project. and expand 3D Views. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. click Training Files.rvt. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 12 Click OK. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. You do not select a view scale to move it. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. expand Views (all). In this table. In this exercise. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. click . Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column.

In the Project Browser.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . expand each view type. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. and click Apply.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. select Discipline. 8 Select Phase. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 5 On the Views tab. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand Sheets (all). and click OK. In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped by phase. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.Phase 2-Structure West Wing .Phase 1-Structure East Wing . select Type/Discipline.

and click OK. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 14 In the Project Browser. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Select Sheet Prefix. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand each sheet set. 16 Click the Views tab.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and click New. click the Folders tab. under Sheets.

Whenever you create a new project or template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. In this lesson. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. and click OK. Creating an Office Template | 831 . The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 21 In the Project Browser. dimensions styles. When you create a new template based on an existing template. You can choose from several templates. the same rules apply. when you create a new project. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. levels. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. and Discipline. click Browse. Creating an Office Template on page 831. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. you select the starting point for your office template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. and click Open. View Type (Family and Type). the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. click Training Files. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. 2 Under Template file. When you create new projects. expand 3D Views. In the lesson that follows. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. expand Complete. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. In that case. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click OK. Proceed to the next lesson. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company.rte template. under Views. and expand both Architectural and Structural. and open Metric\Templates. navigate to your preferred directory. For example. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. you create an office template. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. enter a unique file name. You can also save these settings in a template file. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. If you want to save this file. and view names.

TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Project template. and click OK. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. in the drawing area. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. click Browse. When you create the material. weights. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click North. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. for Create new. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 13 Select the default template. 14 Click Open. 15 Under Create new.5 In the New Project dialog. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. you can select it now. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 9 In the Project Browser. If you want to use a template other than the default. 6 Click OK. For example. close them. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this exercise. 7 In the Project Browser. select Project. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. 12 Under Template File. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. you modify the project settings for your new template. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. If you have additional projects open. drag a zoom region around the level heads.

In the Object Styles dialog. 13 If necessary. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. see the previous lesson. TIP For more information about creating new materials. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. and similar attributes. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. the changes are saved as part of the project template. transparency. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. texture. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. You do this by defining the render appearance. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. create and modify them as needed. annotation objects. you can set line weights.During this exercise. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. create new subcategories. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. line colors. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and change render appearance properties. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. line patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. If you change render appearance properties. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. and imported objects. 4 Click Replace. specific modifications are not dictated. Observe the materials that are already defined. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . When you create or modify a material. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. You can align. or refer to the online help. 2 Scroll down the materials list. Modifying System Settings on page 803. For more information. or modify existing patterns. including color. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. rotate. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. For more details on modifying these settings. and materials for model objects. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. or refer to the online help. and move model patterns. see a preview of the rendered material. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 9 Click OK when finished.

19 If necessary. line color. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. name the style. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. You can add and delete view scales. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 29 Click OK. modify the line weight. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. or line pattern as needed. and dimensions. 34 Click OK. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. such as section lines and dimension lines. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. select it from this list. tags. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. and click Edit. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 20 Click OK. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 18 For existing line categories. select it. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and specify the properties. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. and create new subcategories as needed. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights.15 Modify categories. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. create new line subcategories. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. click Duplicate. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 32 To modify a line pattern. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . To see the details of a particular style. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads.

click Load. select it from this list. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 50 To load new annotation tags. 60 Under Walls. Volume. and specify the properties. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. In the Tags dialog. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 55 Click OK. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. angular. 62 Click OK. 46 Click OK. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 57 Specify the Slope option. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. and click OK. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. TIP In the drawing area. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. click Duplicate. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. and choose a decimal symbol.40 Click OK. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Linear. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. name the style. click Format. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . 58 Click OK. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 53 For Length. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 61 Under Doors and Windows. To see the details of a particular style. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. For example. and Angle settings. and radial dimensions are modified separately.

Use the table below as a checklist. 72 If necessary. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and move view scales as needed. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or edit existing organization types. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. click the Views tab. However. rename. 65 Click OK. 69 If necessary. See Setting up If necessary. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. 71 Delete. create new browser organization types. To move the view scales. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. 68 Delete.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. or edit existing organization types. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. When you create a new view. Using the arrows between the columns. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. Medium. click the arrows between columns. Links to associated tutorials are provided. In such a case. The detail level is based on view scale. In a typical project. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. 70 Click the Sheets tab. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. and make modifications in each area as necessary. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. 73 Click OK. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. You can find additional information in Help. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Although these settings can be saved within a template. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 64 Review the table. rename. For example. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. or Fine. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. create new browser organization types.

You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. or add to this selection. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you can set up the phases. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. phase filters. If you have not completed the previous exercise. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. modify. you may want to delete. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. notice the list of doors already loaded. there are some important thoughts to consider. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. furniture. If this selection is satisfactory. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. the section cut material. If necessary. Although the options are endless. In the steps that follow. or use the Project Browser. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. You can load any family or group into a template. For example. title blocks. and the poche depth. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. 2 In the Type Selector. Depending on the intended use of this template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can set the default contour line interval. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. or electrical fixtures. and electrical fixtures. do so before starting this exercise. For example. click Door. However. In addition. you can move onto the next component type. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. if you load every available window type. Although this is possible. you could load detail components. you do both. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive.

838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .3 To modify. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. and click Open. click Bar. click Edit/New. Select it. and click OK. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. or load a new door type. Modify type properties. Click Duplicate. create. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. expand Families. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. and click OK. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Notice that each family category is listed. click Edit/New. or modify a door. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. and click OK. create. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Make modifications. click Load. In the Element Properties dialog. Enter a name. Navigate to the directory containing the door type.

14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. In addition. you create the views required for your template.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. you created new projects using different templates. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Discipline. To do so. and click Delete. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. To load a title block. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. View Range. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. 13 Click OK. and select the title block type. click Load. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. right-click the component. create. Detail Level. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. This title block is currently part of the template.) 10 Expand the title block. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. In this exercise. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. In addition. click 12 Click Preview. (Element Properties). Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. load. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. 11 On the Options Bar.

15 In the Project Browser. the view is not linked to the template in any way. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. and then click OK. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. under Floor Plans. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type.settings of categories and subcategories. 6 Click OK. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. Every time a new plan view is created. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. under Floor Plans. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. click Apply. click Apply. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. select Site Plan. In addition. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 12 In the Project Browser. you will first modify view templates. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 2 Under Names. double-click Level 2. 18 If you modified any other view templates. double-click South. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. and click OK. under Elevations. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. After applying the template. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 11 Click Apply. select Architectural Plan. and apply the appropriate template. and click OK. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. you can apply a view template to any view. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. open the view from the Project Browser. In this exercise. 4 If necessary. double-click Site. At any time.

27 Create additional levels as needed. under Floor Plans. 20 In the Project Browser. click Orient to a Direction. Black level heads have no associated views. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. Rename. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. click Level.Notice the level names. and click Rename. or delete them as needed. review the floor plans. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. and elevations. Blue level heads have associated plan views. and select the desired view. right-click the ViewCube. right-click {3D}. expand 3D Views. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click the ViewCube. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. 24 On the Options Bar. review the existing floor plans. duplicate. click 29 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Project Browser. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. 22 In the Project Browser. notice that you have the option to rename. If you want to modify view properties. or an edge of the ViewCube. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. or delete this view. To orient the 3D view to a direction. right-click the ViewCube. and click Properties. ceiling plans. 21 In the Project Browser. use the ViewCube. a face. right-click Level 1. and click Save View. enter a view name. If prompted. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. click Orient to View. in the Project Browser. on the View toolbar. right-click the view name. If it does not display. 23 To add more levels to the template. click Schedule/Quantities. select Make Plan View. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. and select the desired direction. 31 Rename the 3D View. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. duplicate. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To orient the 3D view to another view. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. in the shortcut menu. and. (Default 3D View). By default. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view.

modify settings as needed. and modify their properties accordingly. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. To do so. modify settings as needed. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and click OK. on the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Filter tab.You can add schedules to a template. 40 To add views to the sheet. 37 Click OK. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. After the sheet is created.txt for AutoCAD. You can still add views to the sheet. and click OK. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained.txt for MicroStation). On the Sorting/Grouping tab. To later add a title block to a sheet. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select the category type. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. select the default title block. expand Sheets (all). or exportlayersdgn. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. modify settings as needed. click Add View. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. select and order required fields. When you import a DWG or DXF file. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. You are prompted to select a title block. and click OK. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Select a view. in the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. On the Formatting tab. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. and click Rename. On the Appearance tab. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Right-click the sheet name. select one. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 42 Create new sheets as needed. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. assign filters. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. select the title block and delete it.

it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. doors. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). for example. Using shared parameters. 8 In the dialog. 9 Click Save As. windows. and so on. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. You can save these mappings to a text file. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. When scheduling. They cannot be shared with other projects. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. 2 For each category. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and so on. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and they become the set mappings for the project. These settings are retained within the project template. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you normally schedule a single category: rooms.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. project parameters. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. click Save As. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. name the file. therefore. and click Save. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. For example. 5 For each category. name the file. and click Save. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. name the file. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and click Save. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. select Save As. When you create a multi-category schedule.

select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 19 Under Group parameter under. click New. and click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 14 Click Add. select a parameter discipline type. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. select a parameter value type. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 5 Enter the group name. because each office has a unique set of needs. enter a parameter name. 23 Add project parameters as needed. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 6 Create as many groups as needed. click New. and select Shared Parameter.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 8 Under Parameters. 18 Under Type of Parameter. and specify its discipline and type. project parameters. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 Name the parameter. 3 Name and save the file. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. select Project parameter. 2 Click Create. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 24 To add a shared project parameter. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 10 Click OK. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. add required parameters. under Groups. 25 Click Select. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 11 For each parameter group. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 26 Click OK. If this template will be used by multiple team members. click Add. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Under Parameter Data. 22 Click OK. you may want to save the file to a network location. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. For each parameter group. you can create a list of parameters. 21 Under Categories. 17 Under Discipline. and choose a shared parameter. If a file already exists. select a group to add parameters to.

Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. By going first to the Print command. make minor modifications if necessary. and print. In this exercise. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. Click OK. 28 Click OK. and the percent of actual size. for Name. 37 When you have completed the schedule. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 34 For Category. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. select the tag. you can set options such as sheet sizes. enter a name for the schedule. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 6 In the New dialog. and click OK. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. For information on creating multi-category tags. click Setup. 32 Navigate to the directory. and click Open. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 35 For Name. select Multi-Category. you need only select a setting. paper placement. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 3 Under Settings. and make it your default template file. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 Click Save As. By creating named settings within the template. you can load them into the template. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. you create named print settings. The tag is now part of the template. or refer to the online help. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. click OK. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. For each printer. 4 Modify the printer settings. save the file as a template. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 2 Under Printer.

Your template is complete. modify the printer settings. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. In this lesson. and click Open. 9 In the Print dialog. 18 Click Browse. 19 Select the template. click Setup. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Browse. and click Save. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. enter a new name for the printer. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. click Save as. In addition. save it in a network location. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. and click Open. 25 Click OK. select a different printer. If you have a project. 24 Navigate to the template location. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 20 Click OK.rte). 11 Click Close when finished. you ensure that office standards are maintained. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. you modified settings. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 14 Under Save as type. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. You can also set this template as your default template. 15 Name the template. and create new settings for this printer. loaded components. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 For Default template file. Create additional settings as needed.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. By investing the time to individualize your template. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. In addition. select Template Files (*. select it. The only remaining task is to save it. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. and saved them to a template. If you need to share this file with others. and click OK. 22 Click the File Locations tab. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful